and are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.
copyright 2002 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manu-
al are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-
TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs
at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation
to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold.
This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equip-
ment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, there-
fore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
HBF045AB
HBF017AB
This manual describes the following types of the Legacy series.
HBF012AC
HBF018AB
i
– CONTINUED –
Warranties
B Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold
at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come
with the following warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Emission Control Systems Warranty
D Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Please read these war-
ranties carefully.
B Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at
retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the fol-
lowing warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Anti-Corrosion Warranty
D Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is
in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please read these warranties
carefully.
NOTE
This vehicle does not contain mercury devices
or parts.
ii
How to use this owner’s manual
J Using your Owner’s manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect
yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions
in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious
injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins
with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that
chapter contains the information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains
precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indica-
tors and how to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various condi-
tions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving,
such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.
iii
– CONTINUED –
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the
dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your
SUBARU running properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your
SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards
and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manual. You can use it to
quickly find something you want to read.
J Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this
manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in
injury to you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this
manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use
your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death
could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of
your vehicle.
iv
J Safety symbol
HS0008
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol
means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”, depending
upon the context.
Safety precautions when driving
SEATBELT AND SRS AIRBAG
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental
Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fas-
ten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
v
– CONTINUED –
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections “Seat, seatbelts and SRS airbag” in chapter 1
of this owner’s manual for instructions and precautions concerning the
seatbelt system and SRS airbag system.
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
D Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the ve-
hicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from in-
jury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
D While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt. The
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Be-
cause children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk being
injured from deployment is greater.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
vi
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out. Refer to the “Door locks” section in
chapter 2.
D Always lock the passenger’s windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this pro-
cedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win-
dow. Refer to the “Power windows” section in chapter 2.
D Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could ac-
cidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera-
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se-
vere or possibly fatal injuries to them.
D Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the
trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock
all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain
that the trunk is closed. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in
a trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or seri-
ous heat-related injuries including brain damage, particularly for
small children.
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint systems”, “SRS airbag”, and
“Seatbelts” in chapter 1 of this owner’s manual for instructions and pre-
cautions concerning the child restraint system, seatbelt system and SRS
airbag system.
ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (CARBON MONOXIDE)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
vii
– CONTINUED –
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
DRINKING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the
bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception,
judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if
you drink just a little – it will increase the risk of being involved in
a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your pas-
sengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident,
alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since
alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much
alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. How-
ever if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com-
pletely before getting behind the wheel.
viii
DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that
can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may in-
crease your, your passengers’ and other persons’ risk of being
involved in a serious or fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read
the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug
you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking
any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your abil-
ity to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that
requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering
drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take ille-
gal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to
those drugs.
DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR SLEEPY
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If
you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’ and other
persons’ chances of being involved in a serious accident may in-
crease.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to
refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you
should share the driving with others.
ix
– CONTINUED –
CAR/MOBILE PHONES AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Do not use a hand-held phone while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a
hand-held phone, pull off the road and park in the safe place be-
fore using your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free
phones may legally be used while driving.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.
DRIVING WITH PETS
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your atten-
tion from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or
cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your pas-
sengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also
for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your
vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-
cured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s han-
dle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For
further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection so-
ciety or pet shop.
x
TIRE PRESSURES
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can
cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A
sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and
destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold.
Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard.
Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in chapter 11 for detailed
information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Keys and doors
Instruments and controls
Climate control
2
3
4
Audio
Interior equipment
Starting and operating
In case of emergency
5
6
7
9
Appearance care
Maintenance and service
Specifications
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
10
11
12
1
Driving tips
8
xi
– CONTINUED –
Table of contents
xii
Illustrated index
J Exterior
HBF003BB
1 Hood lock release
(page 11-5)
2 Headlight switch (page 3-20)
3 Bulb replacement
(page 11-57)
4 Wiper switch (page 3-26)
5 Moonroof (page 2-30)
6 Roof rail (page 8-20)
7 Door locks (page 2-3)
8 Tire pressure (page 11-39)
9 Flat tires (page 9-4)
Q Tire chains (page 8-16)
W Fog light switch (page 3-24)
E Tie-down hooks (page 9-16)
R Towing hook (page 9-16)
xvii
– CONTINUED –
B Trunk/cargo area
HB8004CB
1 Shopping bag hook
(page 6-21)
2 Accessory power outlet
(page 6-19)
3 Convenient tie-down hooks
(page 6-24)
4 Luggage cover (page 6-22)
5 Subfloor storage (page 6-24)
6 Jack (page 9-26)
7 Jack handle (page 9-26)
8 Spare tire (page 9-26)
HB7019BB
HB7015CB
HB7008DB
HBF015BB
xviii
J Instrument panel
HBF021BB
1 Door locks (page 2-3)
2 Outside mirror (page 3-34)
3 Light control lever (page 3-20)
4 Combination meter (page 3-7)
5 Wiper control lever
(page 3-24)
6 Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 3-7)
7 Climate control (page 4-1)
8 Gear shift lever (MT)
(page 7-12)/Selector lever
(AT) (page 7-15)
9 Audio (page 5-1)
Q Cruise control (page 7-44)
W Horn (page 3-37)
E SRS airbag (page 1-43)
R Tilt steering (page 3-36)
T Fuse box (page 11-52)
Y Hood lock release
(page 11-5)
U Power door locking switch
(page 2-21)
I Power window (page 2-21)
xix
– CONTINUED –
J Light control and wiper control levers/switches
HBF023BB
1 Parking light switch
(page 3-23)
2 Windshield wiper (page 3-24)
3 Mist (page 3-26)
4 Windshield washer
(page 3-26)
5 Rear window wiper and
washer switch (page 3-28)
6 Wiper control lever
(page 3-26)
7 Illumination brightness
control (page 3-22)
8 Light control lever
(page 3-20)
9 Headlight ON/OFF
(page 3-20)
Q Headlight flasher High/Low
beam change (page 3-20)
W Turn signal (for lane change)
(page 3-22)
E Turn signal (page 3-22)
xx
J Combination meter
B Overview
HBF033BB
1 SRS airbag system warning light
(page 3-11)
2 VDC warning light (page 3-15)
3 VDC operation indicator light
(page 3-17)
4 VDC OFF indicator light
(page 3-18)
5 Brake system warning light
(page 3-16)
6 Seatbelt warning light (page 3-11)
7 Turn signal indicator light (page
3-19)
8 Door open warning light
(page 3-17)
9 High beam indicator light
(page 3-19)
Q CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
(page 3-12)
W Charge warning light (page 3-13)
E OIL pressure warning light
(page 3-13)
R AT OIL temperature warning light
(page 3-14)
T Front-wheel drive warning light
(page 3-17)
Y Temperature gauge (page 3-10)
U Clock setting knob (page 3-19)
I Clock (page 3-19)
O Outside temperature indicator
(page 3-9)
P Tachometer (page 3-9)
A Security system indicator lamp
(page 3-18)
S Shift position indicator (page 3-18)
D Trip meter A/B selection and trip
meter reset knob (page 3-7)
F Trip meter (page 3-7)
G Odometer (page 3-7)
H Speedometer (page 3-7)
J Low fuel warning light (page 3-17)
K Fuel gauge (page 3-9)
L ABS warning light (page 3-14)
xxi
– CONTINUED –
B Warning and indicator light
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-11
AIRBAG
SRS airbag system warning light 3-11
CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator lamp
3-12
Charge warning light 3-13
Oil pressure warning light 3-13
AT OIL temperature warning light (if equipped) 3-14
or
ABS warning light 3-14
VDC warning light (if equipped) 3-15
or
Brake system warning light 3-16
Door open warning light 3-17
Low fuel warning light 3-17
Front-wheel drive warning light (if equipped) 3-17
VDC operation indicator light (if equipped) 3-17
VDC OFF indicator light (if equipped) 3-18
Security system indicator light (if equipped) 3-18
Turn signal indicator lights 3-19
High beam indicator light 3-19
xxii
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater (if equipped) 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest (if equipped) 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headrest adjustment
— Rear center seating position on Station wagon 1-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding down the rear seat — Station wagon 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelts 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt safety tips 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fastening the seatbelt 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt maintenance 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint systems 1-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top tether anchorages 1-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43. . . . . . . .
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints 1-43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS frontal airbag 1-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbag (if equipped) 1-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system monitors 1-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system servicing 1-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions against vehicle modification 1-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Front seats
WARNING
D Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.
D Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed be-
cause they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury
in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
D Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
rious internal injury or death.
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-3
– CONTINUED –
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac-
ing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
HB0290HS0233
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit well
back and upright.
Move the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical.
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit
well back and upright.
Move the seat
as far back as
possible.
1-4
HS0247HB0291
Put children in the rearseat properly
restrained at all times.
Do not recline the seatback while
vehicle is moving.
B Fore and aft adjustment
n Manual type
HB1058BA
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then
release the lever and move the seatback and forth to make sure that it
is securely locked into place.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-5
– CONTINUED –
n Power seat (if equipped)
HB1060BA
To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch for-
ward or backward.
B Seat cushion angle and height adjustment (Power seat only)
HB1062BA
HB1078BA
To adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion, move the control
switch in the corresponding direction.
1-6
B Reclining the seatback
n Manual type
HB1072BA
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired posi-
tion. Then release the lever and make sure the seat is securely locked
into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward
with force when released. When operating the reclining lever to return
the seatback, hold it lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.
n Power seat (if equipped)
HB1084BA
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-7
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
While adjusting the seatback, you can not at the same time adjust
the seat position or the seat cushion angle and height.
B Head restraint adjustment
HB1016BA
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head
restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
NOTE
If the seatback is reclined rearward to the same level as the rear
seat cushion with the head restraint removed, a wide flat bed is
made available.
WARNING
D Never drive your car with the seats converted in a flat bed
position. If you do so, occupants will have a greater chance of
being injured even during simple deceleration, acceleration and
cornering since no firm restraint will be available for them.
D Before you lie on the flat bed to take a rest, read the descrip-
tion “Parking your vehicle” in Chapter 7 carefully and follow the
instructions.
1-8
HBS011AA
1. Slide the front seat forward as far as possible.
2. Pull off the head restraint while pressing the release button.
3. Recline the seatback rearward up to the lowest position. Remem-
ber to reinstall the head restraint whenever the seatback is raised
back.
B Lumbar support (if equipped)
HB1059BA
Pull the lever forward or backward.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the amount of support for your
lower back.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-9
– CONTINUED –
Seat heater (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the
engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
D Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
D When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or
any similar materials.
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
HB1073BB
HB1093BB
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or “HI” position on the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature. Selecting the “HI” position
will cause the seat to heat up quicker.
LO: Normal heating
HI: Rapid heating
The indicator located on the switch comes on when the seat heater is in
operation. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed enough or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.
1-10
Rear seats
WARNING
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If
you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback, in
the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them
from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious
injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering or a rapid accel-
eration.
HB0302
Sit well back
and upright.
J Armrest (if equipped)
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of serious injury, passengers must never
be allowed to sit on the center armrest while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-11
– CONTINUED –
HB1068BB HB1100BB
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge of the armrest.
B Loading long objects (Sedan)
WARNING
D Secure long objects properly to prevent them from shooting
forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop or
sharp cornering. Tie long objects down with a rope or something
equivalent.
D Avoid loading objects longer than 6.6 ft (2 m) and heavier than
55 lb (25 kg). Such objects can interfere with the driver’s proper
operation of the car, possibly causing an accident and serious
injury.
HB1053BAHB1052BA
1-12
Folding down the armrest and opening the seatback panel affords a
loading space for long objects.
To open the seatback panel, pull the panel down while pressing the
release tab down.
J Headrest adjustment — Rear center seating position
on Station wagon
HB1099BA
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, push the headrest down while
pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.
When the rear center seating position is occupied, place the headrest in
its highest position. When the rear center seating position is not occu-
pied, lower the headrest to improve rearward visibility.
J Folding down the rear seat — Station wagon
WARNING
D After returning the rear seat to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cush-
ion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
D Never permit anyone to ride in the cargo area.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-13
– CONTINUED –
B Folding down the seatback
HB1095BAHB1094BA
1. Lower the headrests.
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and then fold the
seatback down.
B Folding down the seat cushion and seatback
1. Move the front seat forward.
2. Close the rear passengers’ cup holder and ashtray.
3. Remove the headrests (if so equipped).
Window-side seating positions: Pull the headrest up while pressing
the release button located on the backside of the seatback.
Center seating position: Pull the headrest up while pressing the re-
lease button located on the top of the seatback.
HB1099CBHB1096BB
1-14
4. Store the seatbelts in the seatbelt pockets to prevent them from fal-
ling below the cushion.
HB1074BB
5. Raise the seat cushion by pulling up the tab.
Make certain that the rear passenger’s cup holder is fully retracted
before raising the seat cushion.
HB1097BA
6. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and fold the seat-
back down. Confirm that the pin located at the bottom of the seat
cushion is inserted into the slot at the top of the seatback.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-15
– CONTINUED –
HB1027BA
7. Install the headrests (if so equipped) onto the backside of the seat-
back (window-side positions only).
HB1098BA
To return the rear seat to its original position, raise the seatback and seat
cushion until they lock into place and make sure that they are securely
locked.
Make sure that the rear seatbelts are not under the seat cushion or seat-
back.
Place the headrests (if so equipped) back in their normal position.
1-16
Seatbelts
J Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing
injury.
D Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more persons — even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
D Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and at-
taching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in
a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the child’s height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-17
– CONTINUED –
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child
restraint system, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
B Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. See in-
formation on “Child restraint systems” in this chapter.
B Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in
the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to ac-
cident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a
child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips and not on the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be
used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back.
B Expectant mothers
HS1107AA
1-18
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should con-
sult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be
worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the
waist.
J Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the
retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull
the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
J Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Automatic/Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor normally
functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an
additional locking mode “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode” in-
tended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once
drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor
locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended.
As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, ALR mode is re-
leased.
When securing a child restraint system on the passengers’ seats, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor
is restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function by allow-
ing the seatbelt to retract fully.
For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and re-
store it to the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this
chapter.
J Seatbelt warning light and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver’s
seat.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-19
– CONTINUED –
This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the instrument panel to
light up for about six seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position to remind the driver to wear the seatbelt. If the driver’s
seatbelt is not fastened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.
J Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
D Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this
can increase the risk or severity of injury.
D Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back.
If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
D Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip
bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
rious internal injury or death.
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or
death.
1-20
HS0231
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back.
HS0230
Always wear the
seatbelts correctly.
Adjust the seatback
to upright position.
Sit well back and
upright.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.
B Front seatbelts
OM-H0044OM-H0043
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the
seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still main-
taining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position.
Move the seat as far back as possible.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-21
– CONTINUED –
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it
get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then
pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place
the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
n Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of
the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the
seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt
over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or
in a collision.
HB1029BB
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position
best suited for you. To lower the anchor height, push the release but-
ton and slide the anchor down. To raise the anchor height, slide the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that it is locked in
place.
1-22
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over
the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HB0303
Push
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted prop-
erly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
B Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt on wagon)
OM-H0044OM-H0043
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it
get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it,
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-23
– CONTINUED –
then pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place
the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HB0303
Push
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted prop-
erly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
B Rear center seatbelt on wagon model
WARNING
D Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the
belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when
inserting the connector’s tongue plate into the mating buckle (on
right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.
D Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective
buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the
connector’s tongue plate not fastened to the connector’s buckle
on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in
position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or
death.
1-24
HB1031BAHB1030BA
HS1017BB
HB1032BA
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor.
1. Center seatbelt tongue
plate
2. Connector (tongue)
3. Connector (buckle)
4. Center seatbelt buckle
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-25
– CONTINUED –
HB1033BA
2. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the connec-
tor (tongue) attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-
hand side until a click is heard. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt
still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
HB1034BA
3. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate in the center seatbelt buckle
marked “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it clicks. To make the lap
part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low
as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
1-26
HS1019BA
n Unfastening the seatbelt
HS0317
Push
Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand
side) to unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for greater luggage space, it is
necessary to disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
D Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-27
– CONTINUED –
D Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.
HB1037BAHB1036BA
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the slot in the con-
nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in, and the connec-
tor (tongue) plate will disconnect from the buckle.
HB1048BAHB1038CA
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. You should hold the webbing
end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly
store the tongue plates in the recess in the retractor and then insert
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot located at the front of the
recess.
1-28
NOTE
When folding down the rear seat cushion, store the seatbelts in
the seatbelt pocket to prevent them falling below the cushion.
HB1074BB
J Seatbelt maintenance
CAUTION
D Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
D Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will pre-
vent the seatbelt from operating properly.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never
bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all
hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose
bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is
found.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-29
– CONTINUED –
Front seatbelt pretensioners
WARNING
D To obtain maximum protection, occupants should sit in an up-
right position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” section in this chapter.
D Do not modify, remove or strike the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area. This could result in accidental ac-
tivation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system
inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt preten-
sioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of
front seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners,
see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
D When discarding front seatbelt retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire car due to collision damage or for other reasons,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
HB0373
Seatbelt retractor
assembly
(Pretensioner)
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelts have a seatbelt preten-
sioner. The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the
event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner sensor also serves as a SRS frontal airbag sensor. If
the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during a
frontal collision, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re-
tractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains
1-30
the front seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be
heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt re-
tractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled
out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
D Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor
frontal impacts, in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.
D The driver’s seat and passenger’s seat pretensioners and fron-
tal airbag operate simultaneously.
D Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only ba-
sis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the driver’s
and front passenger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be re-
placed and only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replac-
ing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
D If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out
due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
D If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area
has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
D When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buy-
er that it has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him to the con-
tents of this section.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-31
– CONTINUED –
B System monitors
HB4010EC
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt
pretensioner while the vehicle is being driven. The seatbelt preten-
sioners share the control module with the airbag system. Therefore, if
any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag sys-
tem warning light will illuminate. The SRS airbag system warning light
will show normal system operation by lighting for about 6 seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
D Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
D Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
D Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
D Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
D Seatbelt pretensioner (Passenger’s side)
D All related wiring
In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of following, the vehicle
should be taken promptly to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the
system checked. Unless checked and repaired, the seatbelt preten-
sioners and airbags will not function reliably:
D Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
D No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position.
D Continuous illumination of the warning light.
D Illumination of the warning light while driving.
1-32
B System servicing
WARNING
D When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping
the entire car damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU deal-
er.
D Tampering with or disconnecting the system’s wiring could re-
sult in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or
airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in
serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the seatbelt pretensioner
and SRS airbag systems are covered with yellow insulation and
the connectors of the system are yellow for easy identification.
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the
seatbelt pretensioner and airbag systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the
airbag control module including the impact sensors is located
under the center console. If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, we recommend that
you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the
extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-33
– CONTINUED –
B Precautions against vehicle modification
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifi-
cations can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt perten-
sioners.
D Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory parts to
the front end.
D Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
D Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the
tires specified on the tire placard attached to the door jamb.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any acces-
sory parts to your vehicle.
Child restraint systems
WARNING
D Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a
child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to
another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force, the child could be injured or even
killed.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
1-34
For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats
at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is
appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight. According to
accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
D SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING
THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat at all
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front
passenger’s seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
force and can injure or even kill the child.
HB0306
HB0308
HB0307
Never install rearward facing child
safety seat in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Never allow a child to stand up, or
to kneel on the front passenger’s
seat or any other seat
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms in the front passenger’s
seat or any other seat.
HS1031BB
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-35
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
D Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a ve-
hicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a
child in it.
D Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehi-
cle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike
and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries
or death to the child.
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child
restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should
use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compat-
ible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child’s age and size. All
child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by
lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those cov-
ered under the section in this manual, entitled “Instruction of child re-
straint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages”).
Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint
system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times
while the vehicle is moving.
B Installing child restraint systems with seatbelt
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and
restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored
by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.
1-36
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions supplied with it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in posi-
tion. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in-
creased.
HB1080BA
1. Set the child restraint system in the seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint
system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. If the
shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the
child restraint system.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor
over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indi-
cate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint
can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-37
– CONTINUED –
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
If the child restraint system requires a top tether, latch the hook onto
the top tether anchorage and tighten the top tether. See the “Top teth-
er anchorages” for additional instructions.
HB1083BA
HBS065BA
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on
the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt
will return to the ELR mode.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint sys-
tem, ask your SUBARU dealer.
1-38
B Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and teth-
er anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear
seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint
systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
HB1086BA
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower anchorages (bars) and three
upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child
restraint systems.
HB1090BA
HB1087BA
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint
system only on the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each
window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided.
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided for all the
seating positions (middle and both window-side ones) of the rear seat.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-39
– CONTINUED –
HS1078BA
HB1088BA
You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of the rear seat seatbacks.
These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the
seatback.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint
system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is
not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering per-
sonal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
1. Use the “Child” marks to locate the two lower anchorages (bars)
for the position where you want to install the child restraint system.
2. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer, connect the connectors of the child restraint sys-
tem to the lower anchorages.
When the connectors are fastened, make sure that the adjacent seat-
belts are not caught.
If your child restraint system is of a flexible attachment type (which
uses tether straps to connect the child restraint system proper to the
lower anchorages), firmly tighten the straps after connecting the con-
nectors.
3. Connect the top tether hook to the tether anchorage and firmly
tighten the tether.
1-40
For information on how to set the top tether, read the following “Top
tether anchorages”.
4. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move seat
back and forth to verify that it is held securely in position.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint sys-
tem, ask your SUBARU dealer.
J Top tether anchorages
B Anchorage location
HBS061BB
HB1077BC
Three anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions,
are already installed on the rear shelf (on Sedan) or on the rear edge
of the roof (on Staion wagon).
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-41
– CONTINUED –
B To hook the top tether
n Sedan
CAUTION
When the child restraint system is to be secured using the top
tether, always pass the top tether under the headrest between the
headrest stay posts. If the top tether is routed over the headrest,
it may not be properly tensioned, resulting in an unsteady child
restraint system.
HBS064BDHBS063BA
1. Remove the headrest at the seating position where the child seat
has been installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the
headrest while pressing the release button.
2. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the ap-
propriate upper anchorage.
1-42
HBS065BA
HB1064BA
3. Tighten the top tether securely.
4. Reinstall the headrest in such a way that the top tether is routed
between the headrest stay posts.
n Station wagon
CAUTION
Always remove the headrest when mounting a child restraint sys-
tem with a top tether. Otherwise, it may happen that the top tether
cannot be fastened tightly.
HB1099CBHB1096BB
1. Remove the headrest (if so equipped) at the seating position
where the child restraint system has been installed with the seatbelt or
lower anchorages; lift up the headrest while pressing the release but-
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-43
– CONTINUED –
ton. Store the headrest in the cargo area. Avoid placing the headrest
in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around
in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
HB1081BD
2. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the ap-
propriate upper anchorage.
3. Tighten the top tether securely.
*SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used
because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
J Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS air-
bags and lap/shoulder restraints
WARNING
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the
seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In
combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious accident.
1-44
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system,
see the “Seatbelts” sections in this chapter.
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Be-
cause the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed – faster
than the blink of an eye – and force to protect in high speed colli-
sions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body
is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in
proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident
braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy-
ment force.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
D Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could
be propelled inside the car and cause injury.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-45
– CONTINUED –
(including those in child seats and those that have outgrown
child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at
all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint
system, see the “Child restraint systems” section in this chapter.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-
senger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
HB0291
Put children in the REAR seat prop-
erly restrained at all times.
1-46
CAUTION
D When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get
fresh air promptly.
D A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get
burnt if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition
to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating position.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbags (driver’s
and front passenger’s frontal airbags) or four airbags (driver’s and front
passenger’s frontal airbags and driver’s and front passenger’s side air-
bags).
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the prima-
ry protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation,
instructions are precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, see
the “Front seatbelt pretensioner” section in this chapter.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that
it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him to the applicable
section in this owner’s manual.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-47
– CONTINUED –
B Components
HB1079DB
1 Airbag control module
(including impact sensors)
2 Airbag module (driver’s side)
3 Airbag module
(passenger’s side)
4 Front sub sensor
(left hand side)
5 Front sub sensor
(right hand side)
6 Seatbelt pretensioner
(driver’s side)
7 Seatbelt pretensioner
(passenger’s side)
8 Side airbag module
(driver’s side — if equipped)
9 Side airbag module
(passenger’s side — if
equipped)
Q Side airbag sensor
(driver’s side)
W Side airbag sensor
(passenger’s side)
E Airbag wiring (yellow)
1-48
J SRS frontal airbag
WARNING
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-
senger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
D The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in
proper position such as one thrown toward the front of the car
during pre-accident braking.
HB0306
HB0307
Never install rearward facing child
restraint system in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Never allow a child to stand up, or
to kneel on the front passenger’s
seat
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-49
– CONTINUED –
HB0308
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms.
HS0233
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit well
back and upright.
Move the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical.
HB0290
Adjust the seatback to
upright position. Sit
well back and upright.
Move the seat
as far back as
possible.
WARNING
D Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dash-
board. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the
vehicle and cause injury.
D Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-
wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could become projectiles that could seriously in-
jure vehicle occupants.
1-50
HB1047BB
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the
steering wheel. The passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the
top of the dashboard under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reduc-
ing the impact on the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.
B Operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the
steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deploy-
ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-51
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbags deploy
as soon as a collision
occurs.
After deployment,
SRS airbags start to
deflate immediately
so that the driver’s
vision is not
obstructed.
OM-H0384
Driver’s side Passenger’s side
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
If the front sub sensors inside the both front fenders and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module detect a certain predetermined
amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends
signals to the frontal airbag modules instructing them to inflate the
SRS frontal airbags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which
instantly inflates driver’s and passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. After
the deployment, the SRS airbags immediately start to deflate so that
the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting
impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploys together with driv-
er’s SRS frontal airbag even when no one occupies the front passen-
ger’s seat.
When the SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a
non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate
quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
1-52
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will
be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are
normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in
the vehicle.
The SRS frontal airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an acci-
dent involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not
designed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary
protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically
not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of the SRS frontal airbag would not help
the occupant in those situations. The SRS airbag is designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in
the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from
one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
n Examples of accident in which the SRS frontal airbag will most
likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of
12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates the SRS frontal air-
bag. The SRS frontal airbag will also be activated when the vehicle is
exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the
above-mentioned collision.
HB1055BA
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-53
– CONTINUED –
n Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that
the SRS frontal airbag will deploy.
The SRS frontal airbag may be activated when the vehicle sustains a
hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).
HB1057BAHB1056BA
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal
airbag is unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
SRS frontal airbag deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such
as a telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load
bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS frontal
airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
HB0311HB1042BB
HB1041AB
The vehicle sustains an
oblique offset frontal
impact.
1-54
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS frontal
airbag will basically not deploy.
The SRS frontal airbag is basically not designed to deploy if the
vehicle is struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or
roof, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.
HB1044AB
The vehicle is struck from
the side.
HB0313HB1043BB
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the
SRS frontal airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle,
then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once the SRS
frontal airbag is activated on the first impact, it will not be activated on
the second.
HB1070BB
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-55
– CONTINUED –
J SRS side airbag (if equipped)
WARNING
D The SRS side airbag is designed as only a supplement to the
primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is
not seated in a proper upright position.
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact collision. Howev-
er, the force of SRS side airbag deployment may cause injuries if
your head or other body parts are too close to the SRS side air-
bag.
D Do not rest your arm on either front door or its internal trim. It
could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.
D Never allow a child to kneel on the front passenger’s seat fac-
ing the side window or to wrap his/her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag
deployment could seriously injure or even kill the child because
his/her head or arms or other body parts are close to the side air-
bag. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, children aged 12 and under should be placed in
the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all
times.
1-56
HB0353HB0352
Do not sit or lean unnecessary close
to the front door.
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim.
HB0354
Never allow a child to kneel on the
front passenger’s seat facing the side
window.
HB0355
Never allow a child to wrap his/her
arms around the front seatback.
WARNING
D Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS
side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags.
In the event of the SRS side airbag deployment, they could be
propelled dangerously toward the vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
D Do not put any kind of cover or clothes or other objects over
either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the
front seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could pre-
vent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing protec-
tion available to the front seat’s occupant.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-57
– CONTINUED –
HS0353
Do not put any kind of cover over
either seatback.
Do not attach accessories to the door
trim or near either side airbag and do
not place objects near either side air-
bag.
HB0366
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seatback,
which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the
door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the
occupant’s chest.
B Operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the
front seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so
can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
1-58
SRS side airbag deploys as
soon as a collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS side
airbag starts to deflate immedi-
ately.
HB0359
The SRS side airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags deploy indepen-
dently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. Also, the
SRS side airbag deploys independently of the frontal airbags in the
steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor is incorporated into each of the vehicle’s center pil-
lars. If either sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force
during a side impact collision, the control module sends a signal to
the side airbag module on the impacted side of the vehicle, instruct-
ing it to inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the side airbag module pro-
duces gas, which instantly inflates the SRS side airbag. After the de-
ployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS side airbag
after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The SRS side airbag deploys even when no one occupies the seat on
the side of which an impact is applied.
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-59
– CONTINUED –
When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation
noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indi-
cate a fire in the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact collision. It is basically not
designed to deploy in lesser side impact. Also, it is basically not de-
signed to deploy in frontal or rear impacts because SRS side airbag
deployment would not help the occupant in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only ba-
sis.
SRS side airbag deployment depends on the level of force experi-
enced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have
no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
n Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag
will most likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side air-
bag.
HB0313
1-60
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side air-
bag is unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illus-
trated below, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
HB0363HB0362HB0361
The vehicle strikes a
telephone pole or similar
object.
The vehicle is involved in
a side impact in an area
outside the vicinity of the
passenger compartment.
The vehicle is involved in
an oblique side impact.
HB1044ABHB1045AB
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-61
– CONTINUED –
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side air-
bag will basically not deploy.
The SRS side airbag is basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle
is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from behind. Examples of
such accidents are illustrated below.
HB1043BBHB1046AB
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than
once, the SRS side airbag deploys only once.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one
vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction,
once the SRS side airbag is activated on the first impact, it will not be
activated on the second.
HB1071BB
1-62
J SRS airbag system monitors
HB4010EC
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS air-
bag system (including front seatbelt pretensioners) while the vehicle is
being driven. The SRS airbag system warning light “AIRBAG” will show
normal system operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
D Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
D Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
D Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
D Frontal airbag module (Driver’s side)
D Frontal airbag module (Passenger’s side)
D Side airbag sensor (Driver’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag sensor (Passenger’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag module (Driver’s side — if equipped)
D Side airbag module (Passenger’s side — if equipped)
D Seatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)
D Seatbelt pretensioner (Passenger’s side)
D All related wiring
In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of following, the vehicle
should be taken promptly to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the
system checked. Unless checked and repaired, the SRS airbags will not
function reliably:
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-63
– CONTINUED –
D Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
D No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first
turned to the “ON” position.
D Continuous illumination of the warning light.
D Illumination of the warning light while driving.
J SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
D When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire car
damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
D The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your near-
est SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-
tem’s wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag
or could make the system inoperative, which may result in seri-
ous injury. The wiring harnesses of the SRS airbag system are
covered with yellow insulation and system connectors are yellow
for easy identification.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas listed below, we recommend
that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The
SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules
are stored in these areas.
D Under the center console
D Inside each front fender
D Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
D Top of the dashboard on front passenger’s side and nearby
areas
D Each front seat and nearby area (only for vehicles with SRS
side airbags)
D Inside each center pillar
1-64
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the sys-
tem should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected
by a SUBARU dealer ten years after the date of manufacture, which is
shown on the certification label attached to the driver’s door.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
D The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in
which the SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
D The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger’s
frontal airbag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with SRS side airbags, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in the following
cases.
D Either center pillar or a nearby area of the vehicle was involved
in an accident in which the SRS side airbag did not deploy.
D The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or
otherwise damaged.
J Precautions against vehicle modification
WARNING
D To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the
system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
D Installation of custom steering wheels
D Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
D Installation of custom seats (only for vehicles with SRS side
airbags)
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1-65
– CONTINUED –
D Replacement of seat fabric or leather (only for vehicles with
SRS side airbags)
D Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat
(only for vehicles with SRS side airbags)
D Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such
as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere
with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifi-
cations can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag sys-
tem.
D Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory parts to
the front end.
D Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
D Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the
tires specified on the tire placard attached to the driver’s door
jamb.
D Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protec-
tors, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory parts to the
side body (only for vehicles with side airbags).
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory
parts to your vehicle.
1-66
2
Keys and doors
Keys 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door locks 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power door locking switches 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle finder function 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system (if equipped) 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety locks 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid (Sedan) 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal trunk lid release handle 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear gate (Station wagon) 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof (if equipped) 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan) 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual moonroofs (Station wagon) 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Keys
HS0009
Master key
Submaster key
Valet key
Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.
D Ignition switch
D Doors
D Trunk (sedan) or Rear gate (station wagon)
D Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep
the trunk and glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet
key at a parking facility.
B Key number
The key number is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key
set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not
in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if
you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle.
2
Keys and doors
2-3
– CONTINUED –
Door locks
B Locking and unlocking from the outside
OM-H2394
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
HB2024CB
HB2024BD
To lock the door from the outside without the key, rotate the lock lever
rearward and then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch,
push the switch forward (“LOCK” side) and then close the door. In this
case, all closed doors and the rear gate (for station wagon) are
locked at the same time.
2-4
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before
locking the doors from the outside without the key.
B Locking and unlocking from the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat belts and child restraints, lock-
ing the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the ve-
hicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acci-
dentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors
and entering your vehicle.
HB2001BB
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. To un-
lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (station wagon) are
closed and locked before starting to drive.
2
Keys and doors
2-5
– CONTINUED –
J Power door locking switches
HB2009BBHB2008CB
All doors and the rear gate (station wagon) can be locked and unlocked
by the power door locking switches located at the driver’s side and the
front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, push the switch forward.
To unlock the doors, push the switch rearward.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before
locking the doors from the outside using power door locking
switches.
2-6
Remote keyless entry system (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those
experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
D Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the
battery.
D Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a
cloth immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the following functions.
D Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the station wagon)
without a key
D Sounding a panic alarm
D Arming and disarming the security system (if your vehicle is equipped
with an optional security system). See the next section “Security system
(if equipped)” for detailed information.
The operable distance of the keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environ-
mental conditions. Range may be reduced near sources of RF interfer-
ence such as power plants and radio/television broadcasting towers.
The keyless entry system does not operate when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
2
Keys and doors
2-7
– CONTINUED –
HB1000BE
B Locking the doors
Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than two seconds) to
lock all doors (and rear gate on the station wagon). An electronic
chirp will sound one time and the turn signal lights will flash one time.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) is not fully closed, an electronic
chirp will sound five times and the turn signal lights will flash five
times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, it will automatically lock.
NOTE
If the “LOCK/ALARM” button is pressed for two seconds or long-
er, the panic alarm will sound. When locking the doors in normal
circumstances, press the “LOCK/ALARM” button for less than
two seconds. For details on the panic alarm, refer to “Sounding
the panic alarm”.
B Unlocking the doors
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less than two
seconds) to unlock the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will sound
two times and the turn signal lights will flash two times. To unlock all
doors (and rear gate on the station wagon), briefly press the
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button a second time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and second presses of the “UN-
2-8
LOCK/DISARM” button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.
B Illuminated entry
The interior (dome) light will illuminate when the “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button is pressed. These lights stay illuminated for approximately 30
seconds if any of the doors (or the rear gate on the station wagon) is
not opened.
If the “LOCK/ARM” button is pressed before 30 seconds have
elapsed, these lights will go out. Also, these lights will go out if the key
is inserted in the ignition switch. The interior light must be set to the
middle position in order for this function to operate.
J Vehicle finder function
Use this functon to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a
large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the ve-
hicle, pressing the “LOCK/ARM” button three times in a five-second peri-
od will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound one time and its turn signal
lights to flash three times.
B Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button pressed for more
than two seconds.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be
deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
B Selecting audible signal operation
Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal
when the doors lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn the audible
signal off.
To turn the audible signal off, unlock the doors by pushing “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button and then simultaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and
“UNLOCK/DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An electronic
chirp will sound two times and the turn signal lights will flash two
times to inform you that the audible signal has been turned off.
2
Keys and doors
2-9
– CONTINUED –
To turn the audible signal on, unlock the doors by pushing “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button and then simultaneously depress “LOCK/ARM” and
“UNLOCK/DISARM” buttons for more than two seconds. An electronic
chirp will sound one time and the turn signal lights will flash two times
to inform you that the audible signal has been turned on.
B Replacing the battery
CAUTION
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when
replacing the battery.
When the transmitter battery begins to get weak, transmitter range will
begin to decrease and the LED will not illuminate. Replace the battery
as soon as possible.
HB1002BBHB1001BA
Positive (+)
side facing up
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the two screws on the back of the transmitter case by
using a phillips screwdriver.
2. Separate the case.
3. Remove the old battery from the holder.
4. Replace with a new battery (Type CR2032 or equivalent) making
sure to install the new battery with the positive (+) side facing up.
5. Install the back half of the transmitter case.
6. Reinstall the two screws on the back of the transmitter case.
After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchro-
2-10
nized with the keyless entry system’s control unit. Press either
the “LOCK/ARM” or “UNLOCK/DISARM” button six times to syn-
chronize the unit.
B Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters
(up to four can be programmed), you should re-program all of your
transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have
your dealer program all of your transmitters into your system.
n Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning
feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the sys-
tem or to delete old ones. The system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or dif-
ferent.
To enter the programming mode:
HB1005BCHB1000CB
1 Press to dis-
arm the security
system (if so
equipped).
2
3
1. Disarm the security system. (if your vehicle is equipped with the
optional security system.)
2. Open the driver’s door and sit in the driver’s seat.
3. Close the driver’s door.
2
Keys and doors
2-11
– CONTINUED –
HB2032BB
4. Place the ignition key into the ignition switch and cycle the switch
from LOCK to ON ten times within 15 seconds. Be sure to stop at the
LOCK position. The horn will sound once to indicate that you are in
the transmitter programming mode.
NOTE
You must finish the next step (opening the driver’s door) within
45 seconds of starting this procedures.
To program the transmitters:
HB1000DB
1
2
HB1005BB
3 Press any button.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Close the driver’s door.
3. Press and release any button on the transmitter that you wish to
program into the system. The horn will sound two times to indicate
2-12
that the transmitter has been programmed.
Any additional transmitters can also be programmed at this time.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for an additional transmitter.
To exit the programming mode:
1. After all of your transmitters are programmed, remove the key from
the ignition switch.
The horn will sound three times to indicate that the system has exited
the programming mode.
2. Make sure that the keyless entry system properly operates by
operating each transmitter.
n Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the keyless entry system has four memory loca-
tions to store transmitter codes, giving it the ability to operate with up
to four transmitters. When you lose a transmitter, the lost transmitter’s
code remains in the memory. For security reasons, lost transmitter
codes should be deleted from the memory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program four transmitter codes into
the system. If you have only one current transmitter, program it four
times. If you have two current transmitters, program each one twice. If
you have three current transmitters, program two of them once and
the third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter
codes in the system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating their keyless entry system
within range of your vehicle when programming transmitters. If
someone else were to operate their remote transmitter while you
are programming your transmitters, it is possible that their trans-
mitter code will be programmed into your system, allowing them
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
2
Keys and doors
2-13
– CONTINUED –
Security system (if equipped)
The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from
theft. The horn sounds and the turn signal lights flash if someone
attempts to break into your vehicle. The starter motor is also interrupted
to prevent starting the vehicle without a key.
The system can be armed and disarmed with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
B System operation
The security system will give the following alarm indications when trig-
gered:
D The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will sound intermit-
tently. In addition, the starter motor will not operate.
D The alarm automatically resets after 30 seconds; however, the
alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
will continue for six times if any sensor continues to be activated.
The alarm is triggered by:
D Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk lid.
D Application of physical shock to the vehicle (e.g. breaking glass or
forced entry). Note that there are two alarm levels for shock: warning
and alarm. In warning mode, the alarm detects lower level vibrations
and triggers 2 warning chirps on the horn and two flashes on the
lights as a deterrent to would be vandals. In alarm mode, higher lev-
els of shock are detected and the system will go into full alarm.
D Ignition switch being turned on while in armed state.
NOTE
With the valet mode selected, the security system does not oper-
ate and the parking lights do not flash when the remote transmit-
ter is used for locking and unlocking.
The security system indicator light in the combination meter
flashes twice per second to show that the valet mode is selected.
For details, refer to “Valet mode” in this section.
2-14
B Arming the system
n To arm the system using remote transmitter
HB2033BB
Press to
Arm the
system.
Press to
Disarm the
system.
HB1000EB
1. Close all windows and moonroofs (if so equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and the trunk lid) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on the station wagon).
6. Briefly press the “LOCK/ARM” button (for less than two seconds).
All doors (and the rear gate on the station wagon) will lock, an elec-
tronic chirp will sound one time, the turn signal lights will flash one
time and the indicator light starts flashing slowly (approximately once
every two seconds).
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid) is not fully closed, an elec-
tronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to
alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will automatically arm and doors
will automatically lock.
2
Keys and doors
2-15
– CONTINUED –
n To arm the system using power door locking switches
HB2024CC
1. Close all windows and moonroofs (if so equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and the trunk lid) is locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on the station wagon) but leave
only the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Push the power door locking switch forward (“LOCK” side) to set
the door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will sound one time, the turn
signal lights will flash one time and the indicator light will start flashing
slowly (approximately once every two seconds) to inform you that the
system has armed.
NOTE
The system can be armed even if the engine hood, the windows
and/or moonroofs are opened. Always make sure that they are
fully closed before arming the system.
B Disarming the system
Briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button (for less than two
seconds) on the remote transmitter. The driver’s door will unlock, an
electronic chirp will sound two times, the turn signal lights will flash
two times and the indicator light will go off.
To unlock all other doors (and the rear gate on the station wagon),
2-16
briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button a second time.
n Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the transmitter (i.e. the trans-
mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can
disarm the system without using the transmitter.
To disarm the system:
1. Unlock the door with the key and then open the door.
2. The alarm will sound.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and cycle it from the “LOCK”
to the “ON” position three (3) times within 5 seconds.
B Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, keep the “LOCK/ARM” button pressed for more
than two seconds.
The horn will sound and the turn signal lights will flash.
To deactivate it, press the “LOCK/ARM” button or “UNLOCK/DISARM”
button.
The parking lights will also flash when the alarm is activated.
Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm will be deacti-
vated after approximately 30 seconds.
B Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the security system does not oper-
ate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and
unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the station wagon) and panic
activation.
To enter the valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep the
“UNLOCK/DISARM” button depressed for more than two seconds.
The security system indicator light will continue to flash 2 times per
second indicating that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, open the driver’s door and keep the “UNLOCK/
DISARM” button pressed for more than two seconds. The indicator
will stop flashing.
2
Keys and doors
2-17
– CONTINUED –
B Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been programmed by the dealer,
arming of the system is automatically accomplished without using the
remote transmitter. Note that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE MANU-
ALLY LOCKED.
n To enter the passive mode
WARNING
Do not disconnect or tamper with any yellow connector and/or
any harness covered with yellow insulation and/or tape.
Doing so could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or
could make the SRS airbag system inoperative, which may result
in serious injury.
HB2038BBHB2036BA
1. Remove the side sill cover on the driver’s side.
1) Open the driver’s door.
2) Remove the two clips fastening the front portion of the cover
with a screwdriver.
3) Remove the side sill cover by pulling it up.
2. Connect the white (1 pole) connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the “ON” position.
4. Install the side sill cover.
To place the system in active arming mode (remote required for ac-
tivation), disconnect the white connector.
2-18
n Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will automatically activate the alarm
but WILL NOT automatically lock the doors. In order to lock the
doors you must either lock them as indicated in step 4 below or
with the key once they have been closed. Failure to lock the
doors manually will result in a higher security risk.
HB2024DBHB2031BB
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to “LOCK” position and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors with the inside door lock
levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will automatically arm after one min-
ute.
In the passive mode, the system can also be armed with the remote
transmitter or with the power door locking switches. If the remote
transmitter or power door lock switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm-
ing will take place immediately regardless of whether or not the pas-
sive mode has been selected.
B Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the “UNLOCK/DISARM” button on
2
Keys and doors
2-19
– CONTINUED –
the transmitter.
B Tripped sensor identification
If an electronic chirp sounds four times and the turn signal lights flash
four times when you disarm the system, this indicates that the alarm
was triggered. The number of times the indicator light flashes indi-
cates what sensor caused the alarm condition.
To enter identification mode:
1. Open the driver’s door and leave it open.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position two times. (“LOCK” →
“ON” → “LOCK” → “ON” → “LOCK”)
3. The indicator light will start flashing.
The indicator light provides the following indications.
Flashing one time: Any door, the rear gate or the trunk lid has been
opened.
Flashing three times: The impact sensor in the system’s unit has
been activated. This may indicate that your vehicle has been shocked
or tampered with by some outside force and/or unauthorized person.
Flashing four times: The ignition switch has been turned on or the
battery has been disconnected.
NOTE
The battery must be reconnected before the indicator light will
flash.
To exit this mode, close the door and turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position.
2-20
Child safety locks
WARNING
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out.
HB2002BB
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being
opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot
be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle
lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.
2
Keys and doors
2-21
– CONTINUED –
Windows
J Power windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must
observe the following warnings:
D When operating power windows, be extremely careful to pre-
vent anyone’s fingers, arms or head from being caught in the
window.
D Always lock the passengers’ windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle.
D Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
B Driver’s side switches
HB2008BB
2-22
HB2008DB
All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch clus-
ter at the driver side door.
n Operating the driver’s window
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long
as the switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto down feature that allows the
window to be opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will
fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as
the switch is held.
n Operating the passengers’ windows
To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropriate switch down
and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the
window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi-
tion.
n Locking the passengers’ windows
To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be
opened or closed.
2
Keys and doors
2-23
– CONTINUED –
B Passengers’ side switches
HB2005BBHB2009CB
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the win-
dow reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch
up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on
the driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ win-
dows cannot be operated with the passengers’ switches.
2-24
Trunk lid (Sedan)
WARNING
D To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
D Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the
trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock
all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain
that the trunk is closed. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in
the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or
serious heat-related injuries including brain damage, particularly
for small children.
B To open and close the trunk lid from outside
HBF013CB
To open the trunk lid from outside, insert the key and turn it clockwise.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the latch
engages.
2
Keys and doors
2-25
– CONTINUED –
B To open the trunk lid from inside
HB3000CB
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
B To cancel the trunk lid release
HBF014BA
The inside trunk lid release can be cancelled to help prevent unautho-
rized entry into the trunk. To cancel the trunk lid release, set the lid
release cancel lever (located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted to
the trunk lid latch) to the “CANCEL” position. When this lock is in the
“CANCEL” position, the trunk can be opened only with the key.
2-26
J Internal trunk lid release handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a device designed to open the
trunk lid from inside the trunk. In the event children or adults become
locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The han-
dle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a
child is inside the trunk and the child opens the lid using the re-
lease handle, the child could fall out and be killed or seriously in-
jured.
CAUTION
D Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
D Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk. Such use may result in damage of
the handle.
D Load the trunk so that cargo can not strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pushed down and the trunk lid may open. That
may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traf-
fic safety hazard.
2
Keys and doors
2-27
– CONTINUED –
HBS070BA
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, press the yellow handle down-
ward as indicated by the arrow on the handle. This operation unlocks the
trunk lid. Then, push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that remains luminescent for approxi-
mately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is exposed to ambient light
even for a short time.
B Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice a year to check the release
handle for correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
HBS072BB
HBS071BA
2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade. Slide the screwdriver blade
from the slit aperture of the lock assembly fully to the end until you
hear a click. This places the latch in the locked position.
2-28
3. Move the release handle, from outside the vehicle, in the direction
of the arrow to check if the latch is released.
HG2018BA
If the latch is not released, contact your SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movements of the release handle feel restricted or not en-
tirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is
cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer.
2
Keys and doors
2-29
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate (Station wagon)
WARNING
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed while driving.
CAUTION
Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear gate open.
HB2022BB
To unlock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it clock-
wise. To lock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it coun-
terclockwise. If your vehicle is equipped with power door locking
switches, the rear gate can also be locked and unlocked through use of
the power door locking switches. Refer to “Power door locking switches”
section in this chapter.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside
handle up. To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly
until the latch engages.
2-30
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any objects protrude
from the moonroof. He/she could be seriously injured if the
vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is in-
volved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must
observe the following warnings:
D Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
D Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in injury to a child operating the moonroof.
CAUTION
D Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.
D Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
J Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan)
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.
The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
2
Keys and doors
2-31
– CONTINUED –
HB2034BB
B To raise or lower the moonroof
The tilting function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to raise the moonroof.
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been
lowered completely. Pushing the switch continuously may cause dam-
age to the moonroof.
B To open or close the moonroof
Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward to open the moonroof. The
sun shade will be also opened together with the moonroof.
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to close the moonroof. The
moonroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the switch.
Release the switch once and push it again to close the moonroof
completely.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof
prior to opening the moonroof to prevent water drops from falling into
the passenger compartment.
NOTE
If the moonroof cannot be closed through the switch operation
because of system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-
headed wrench. For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof — if the
moonroof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9 “In case of emer-
2-32
gency”.
B Sun shade
OM-H2355
The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the
moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back.
J Dual moonroofs (Station wagon)
HB2030AAHB2029AA
The front moonroof has a tilting function and the rear moonroof has a
sliding function.
Both moonroofs operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion.
2
Keys and doors
2-33
– CONTINUED –
HB2006BB
To open the moonroof(s)
1. Open the front sunshade.
2. Continually push the rear side (OPEN) of the switch, and the front
moonroof will tilt up and stop automatically.
3. If you want to open the rear moonroof as well, release the switch once
and then push the rear side of the switch continuously.
The rear moonroof will begin to slide open together with the rear sunshade,
then stop automatically at 7.9 in (20 cm) in a partially open position.
4. To fully open it, release the switch once, then push the rear side of the
switch again and keep it depressed until the full open position is
reached.
To close the moonroof(s)
1. Push the front side (CLOSE) of the switch. The rear moonroof will slide
to close together with the rear sunshade while the switch is being
pressed, then stop automatically at a position 5.9 in (15 cm) away from
the fully closed position.
2. To close the rear moonroof fully, release the switch once, then push
the front side of the switch continuously again.
3. If you want to close the front moonroof as well, push the switch again.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof
prior to opening the moonroof to prevent water drops from falling into the
passenger’s compartment.
2-34
NOTE
D Driving with the moonroof fully open can cause a great deal of
wind noise. If such a condition has been encountered, close the
moonroof up to the initial stop position of 7.9 in (20 cm), and the
wind noise should diminish.
D If the moonroof cannot be closed through switch operation
because of system failure, it can be closed manually using a hex-
headed wrench. For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof — if the
moonroof cannot be closed” in Chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.
B Sun shades
OM-H2355
n Front sun shade
The front sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand regard-
less of the moonroof position.
n Rear sun shade
The rear sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while
the rear moonroof is closed. If the rear moonroof is opened, the sun
shade also moves back.
3
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key reminder chime 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning flasher 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meters and gauges 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer/Trip meter 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature gauge 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and indicator lights 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system warning light 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp 3-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charge warning light 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure warning light 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS warning light 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) warning light
(if equipped) 3-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door open warning lights 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low fuel warning light 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles
except GT and vehicle with VDC) 3-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) operation indicator
light (if equipped) 3-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) OFF indicator light
(if equipped) 3-18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system status indicator light (if equipped) 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift position indicator (for AT vehicles) 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal indicator lights 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High beam indicator light 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light control switch 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime running light system 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal lever 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illumination brightness control 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Parking light switch 3-23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch (if equipped) 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside mirror 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Instruments and controls
3-3
– CONTINUED –
Ignition switch
WARNING
Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while the vehicle is be-
ing driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, pre-
venting steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than usual to steer.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
HB4000CA
B LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition
switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right
and left as you turn the key.
3-4
n Automatic transmission vehicles
HB2032CAHB4016BA
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the selector
lever is in the “P” position.
n Manual transmission vehicles
OM-H0144
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the key is
pushed in while turning it.
B ACC
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory power
socket, etc.) can be used.
B ON
This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.
3
Instruments and controls
3-5
– CONTINUED –
B START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while the
engine is running.
The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to
start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the
key automatically returns to the “ON” position.
J Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door opens and the key is
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime stops when the key is re-
moved from the ignition switch.
J Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light
comes on when driver’s door is opened. The light remains on for 10 se-
conds and goes out after driver’s door is closed or if the key is turned to
the “ON” position.
J Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position even when the selec-
tor lever is in the “P” position:
HB3011BA
3-6
OM-H0146HB3012BA
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. Remove the cover under the steering column using a phillips
screwdriver.
3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key interlock release lever.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have
the key interlock system repaired.
3
Instruments and controls
3-7
– CONTINUED –
Hazard warning flasher
HB8002BA
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have
to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning
flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button
on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
J Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
J Odometer/Trip meter
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the in-
dicator during driving, as an accident could result.
3-8
HB3015BB
B Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driv-
en.
B Double trip meter
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven
since you last set it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the function alternately.
A trip meter B trip meter
To set the trip meter to zero, select either the A trip or B trip meter and
push the knob and keep it pushed for more than 1 second.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is bro-
ken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replace-
ment, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
3
Instruments and controls
3-9
– CONTINUED –
J Tachometer
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in
the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine
control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The
engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is
reduced below the red zone.
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute.
J Outside temperature indicator (if equipped)
The outside temperature indicator shows the outside temperature in a
range from –22°F to 122°F (–30°C to 50°C).
The indicator can give a false reading under any of the following condi-
tions:
D When there is too much sun.
D During idling; while running at low speeds in a traffic jam; when the
engine is restarted immediately following a shutdown.
D When the actual outside temperature falls outside the specified indi-
cator range.
For vehicles with an automatic climate control, outside temperature
can be displayed on the climate control display panel. Refer to the
“Automatic climate control system” in chapter 4.
J Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
tank.
The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel level movement in the tank.
3-10
J Temperature gauge
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See “In case of emergency” in chapter 9.
HB2012BB
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temper-
ature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temper-
ature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is
optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high rev-
ving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be
avoided.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and
then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the “ON” posi-
tion. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
The following lights come on:
3
Instruments and controls
3-11
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt warning light
SRS airbag system warning light
CHECK ENGINE warning light / Malfunction indicator lamp
Charge warning light
Oil pressure warning light
AT OIL temperature warning light (AT vehicles)
ABS warning light
VDC warning light (if equipped)
VDC operation indicator light (if equipped)
VDC OFF indicator light (if equipped)
Brake system warning light
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunc-
tion of the corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
J Seatbelt warning light and chime
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt
warning light will come on and the reminder chime will sound for about
six seconds to remind the driver to fasten the seatbelt.
The seatbelt warning light remains on for about six seconds and turns off
automatically after six seconds.
The seatbelt reminder chime will turn off when the driver’s side seatbelt is
buckled or it will turn off automatically after six seconds.
J SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the SRS airbag
system warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This
shows the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side airbag (if equipped) and
seatbelt pretensioners are in normal operation.
If this light comes on while driving or remains illuminated even after a
period of about 6 seconds from when the ignition has been turned on, it
may indicate that the SRS frontal airbag system or SRS side airbag sys-
tem (if equipped) or seatbelt pretensioner system is not working proper-
ly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
3-12
J CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator lamp
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the
emission control system checked and repaired as necessary
could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is a problem or potential problem somewhere in the
emission control system.
B If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the
engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been de-
tected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU
dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on could be a
loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap.
Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light
turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does
not go out, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
B If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has
been detected which may damage the emission control system.
3
Instruments and controls
3-13
– CONTINUED –
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you
should do the following:
D Reduce vehicle speed.
D Avoid hard acceleration.
D Avoid steep uphill grades.
D Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
D Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on
steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Charge warning light
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
charging system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alterna-
tor belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but
the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Oil pressure warning light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on.
This may cause serious engine damage.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working prop-
erly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine
oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at
the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
3-14
J AT OIL TEMPerature warning light
(for AT vehicles)
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
automatic transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the vehicle,
but avoid driving up steep grades or in stop and go traffic.
B Automatic transmission control system warning
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the auto-
matic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
J ABS warning light
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
work properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system continues to operate normal-
ly.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the ABS system
may be considered normal.
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3
Instruments and controls
3-15
– CONTINUED –
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but
goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started,
but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12
km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to
the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
J VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes out after the engine has started. It indicates that
the VDC system is operational.
The VDC system is probably inoperative under any of the following
conditions. Immediately have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer.
D The VDC warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
D The VDC warning light remains on after the engine has started and
stays lit even when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The VDC warning light comes on while the vehicle is running.
D If the electrical circuit of the VDC system itself becomes faulty, the
VDC warning light only comes on. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) remains fully operational.
D The warning light comes on when the electronic control system of the
ABS/VDC system becomes faulty.
The VDC system provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of
the ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the VDC system
also becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, the VDC sys-
tem becomes inoperative, causing the VDC warning light to come on.
Though both the VDC and ABS systems are inoperative in this case, the
ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe
3-16
while driving with this condition, but you should have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the VDC system
may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but
goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started,
but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph about (12
km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out im-
mediately and remains off.
J Brake system warning light
WARNING
D Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
D If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
This light has the following two functions:
B Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It goes out when the parking brake is
fully released.
B Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid level has dropped to near
the “MIN” level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position and with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving (with
the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch posi-
(U.S.)
(Canada)
3
Instruments and controls
3-17
– CONTINUED –
tioned in “ON”), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or
worn brake pads. Have your vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
J Door open warning lights
The specific door open warning light comes on if any door or the rear
gate is not fully closed.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.
J Low fuel warning light
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty about
2.6 U.S. gal. (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp. gal.). It only operates when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an
internal fuel quantity of about 3.7 U.S. gal. (14 liters, 3.1 Imp. gal.).
J Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles
except GT and vehicle with VDC)
This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive
mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar
purposes.
J VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) operation
indicator light (if equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is ON and goes out about 2
seconds later.
It blinks when the skid suppression function is activated. It illuminates
when only the traction control function is operating.
The VDC system is probably faulty under any of the following conditions.
Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
D The light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
D The light does not go out even after a period of about 2 seconds after
3-18
the ignition switch has been turned to the “ON” position.
J VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) OFF indicator
light (if equipped)
D This indicator light comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON
and goes out about 6 seconds after the engine has started.
D It comes on when the VDC system is deactivated (by operating “VDC
OFF” switch or in the standby state).
NOTE
D The light may stay on for a while after the engine has been
started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the exis-
tence of a problem. The light should go out as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
D The “VDC OFF” indicator light comes on when the engine has de-
veloped a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light is on.
The VDC system is probably faulty under any of the following conditions.
Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
D The VDC OFF indicator light does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
D The light does not go out even after several minutes have passed (the
engine has warmed up) after the engine has been started.
J Security system status indicator light
(if equipped)
This light is found at the bottom center of the combination meter panel.
On vehicles equipped with a security system, it blinks to show the driver
the operational status of the security system. For detailed information, re-
fer to the “Security system” in Chapter 2.
J Shift position indicator (for AT vehicles)
This indicator shows the position of the shift lever.
If the transmission has a Sport Shift mode, the position of the shift lever is
shown by another indicator during Sport Shift mode operation. For de-
tails, refer to Chapter 7, “Automatic transmission”.
3
Instruments and controls
3-19
– CONTINUED –
J Turn signal indicator lights
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb
may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to the
“Replacing bulbs” section in chapter 11.
J High beam indicator light
This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when the headlight flasher is operated.
Clock
HB2013BA
To set the time, turn the setting knob clockwise to advance and counter-
clockwise to retard the time.
3-20
Light control switch
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge resulting from accidentally leaving
your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch oper-
ates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. In any
other position, the vehicle’s lights will be out.
If you park your vehicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert the other drivers.
HB2014BBHB2007BA
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
B Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal
lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights and license
plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights,
and license plate light are on.
3
Instruments and controls
3-21
– CONTINUED –
B High/low beam change (dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever
forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indi-
cator light “a” on the instrument panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.
B Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a
few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it.
The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The
headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF”
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light
“a” on the instrument panel also comes on.
J Daytime running light system
WARNING
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not
turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch
must always be turned to the “a” position when it is dark out-
side.
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced bright-
ness when the engine has started, under the following conditions:
D The parking brake is fully released.
D The light switch is in the “OFF” or “p” position.
3-22
Turn signal lever
HB2015BB
Right turn
Left turn
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate
the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is fin-
ished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after
cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly
and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will
flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-
matically to the neutral position when you release it.
Illumination brightness control
HB2017BB
3
Instruments and controls
3-23
– CONTINUED –
When the lighting switch is in the “p” or “a” position, you can adjust
brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise.
To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.
Parking light switch
HB2018BA
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ignition switch posi-
tion.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights will come on.
– Parking lights
– Front and rear side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down
the battery.
3-24
Fog light switch (if equipped)
The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam. Push
the fog light switch to turn the fog lights on.
Press the switch again to turn them off.
HB2025BB
The indicator light located on the switch will illuminate when the fog
lights are on.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the
windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
D Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten se-
conds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
3
Instruments and controls
3-25
– CONTINUED –
D Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window
is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on
a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield
washer.
D In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not fro-
zen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the
wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to
the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade
is frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster,
wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning
on the wiper.
D If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some oth-
er obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out
even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop
the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper opera-
tion.
D Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See “Windshield washer fluid”
section in chapter 11.)
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
D Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
D The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
D Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a
washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations
of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button depressed at least
for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the
3-26
windshield or rear window.
D Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the
wiper blades results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of
the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water.
The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with
water.
D If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this pro-
cedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the “Wiper
blade replacement” section (chapter 11) for replacement instruc-
tions.
J Windshield wiper and washer switches
B Windshield wipers
HB2019BB
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.
: Intermittent
LO : Low speed
HI : High speed
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” position.
3
Instruments and controls
3-27
– CONTINUED –
B Wiper intermittent time control (if equipped)
HB2023BA
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn the dial to adjust
the operating interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted continuously from the shortest
interval to the longest.
Two click stop positions of the dial may help you to aim at your de-
sired interval.
B Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers
operate until you release the lever.
B Washer
HB2020BA
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wip-
3-28
er control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer
button. The wipers operate while you push the button.
J Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped)
HB2021BC
B Rear wiper
The rear wiper offers intermittent operation only.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control
lever upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the
“OFF” position.
B Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever upward to the “
” posi-
tion. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever downward to the “
”
position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you re-
lease the knob.
3
Instruments and controls
3-29
– CONTINUED –
Rear window defogger switch
CAUTION
D Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing
abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed on the window.
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate
the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
The rear window defogger switch is located on the climate control panel.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the win-
dow clears before that time, push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If
defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you
have to push the switch to turn it on again.
B For vehicles with manual heating and air conditioning systems
HB5009BB
To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
The indicator light located on the switch lights up while the rear win-
dow defogger is operating.
3-30
B For vehicles with automatic climate control
HB3016BB
To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
The indicator light “u” lights up on the climate control display panel
while the rear window defogger is operating.
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
windshield wiper deicer continuously for any longer than neces-
sary.
HB2027BB
3
Instruments and controls
3-31
– CONTINUED –
The windshield wiper deicer operates only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
Before turning on the windshield wiper deicer, remove any snow from the
windshield. To turn on the windshield wiper deicer, push the switch. The
indicator light located on the switch lights up while the windshield wiper
deicer is operating.
The windshield wiper deicer will automatically shut off after about 15 min-
utes. If the wiper blades have been deiced completely before that time,
push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If deicing is not complete when
you restart your vehicle, you have to push the switch to turn the deicer
on again.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
J Inside mirror
HB4003BB
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom
of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day
position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.
3-32
B Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)
HB6019BB
The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an anti-glare feature which au-
tomatically reduces glare coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
D By pressing and releasing the left button, the automatic dimming
function is toggled on or off. When the automatic dimming function is
on, the auto dimming indicator light (green) located to the right of the
button will illuminate.
D By pressing and releasing the right button, the compass display is
toggled on or off. When the compass is on, an illuminated compass
reading will appear in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, the mirror surface turns bright
if the transmission is shifted into reverse. This is to ensure good rear-
ward visibility during reversing.
3
Instruments and controls
3-33
– CONTINUED –
n Photosensors
HB6020BA
The mirror has a photosensor attached on both the front and back
sides. If the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you strikes
the mirror, these sensors detect it and make the reflection surface of
the mirror dimmer to help prevent you from being blinded. For this
reason, use care not to cover the sensors with stickers, or other simi-
lar items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator.
n Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all nonessential electrical ac-
cessories (rear window defogger, heater/air conditioning system,
spotlight, etc.) and ensure all doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metallic objects or
structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then release, and the
compass will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and direction will be
displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” disappears from the display
(about two or three circles).
5. The compass is now calibrated. Further calibration is not required.
The compass will automatically calibrate from this point forward.
3-34
n Compass zone adjustment
HB6021AB
1. The zone setting is factory preset to Zone 8. Refer to the “Com-
pass calibration zone” map shown above or one attached to the end
of this manual to verify that the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3 seconds then release, and the
word “ZONE” will briefly appear and then the zone number will be dis-
played.
3. Press the right hand button repeatedly to cycle the display through
all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will exit the zone setting mode.
J Outside mirrors
B Convex mirror (Passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than
when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to
judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes.
Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the
actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mir-
ror.
3
Instruments and controls
3-35
– CONTINUED –
B Adjusting mirrors
To adjust the mirrors by hand, push where indicated by the arrows.
OM-H2737
B Remote control mirror switch (if equipped)
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
HB4004BB
1. Press either end of the selection switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the
right.
2. Move the direction control switch in the direction you want to move
the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent
unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
3-36
B Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
The outside mirror defogger operates only when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
HB4004CB
To turn on the outside mirror defogger, push the switch while the en-
gine is running.
The indicator light located on the switch will come on when the out-
side mirror defogger heater in operation.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
Tilt steering wheel
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
3
Instruments and controls
3-37
– CONTINUED –
HB4002BA
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the “Front seat” section (chapter 1).
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up
and down.
Horn
OM-H0440
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
3-38
4
Climate control
Ventilator 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual heating and air conditioning system 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater operation 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioner operation 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic climate control system (if equipped) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filtration system (if equipped) 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Ventilator
B Center and side ventilators
HB5001BB
B Adjustable side defroster grille (for driver’s side only)
HB5003BBHB5002BB
Normal position
Side defroster grille
Fin
Windshield
defrost assist
position
The driver’s side defroster grille is adjustable. The normal position as
shown in the diagram directs warm air to the side glass. When more
rapid defrosting of the windshield is desired, the air flow can be
directed temporarily toward the windshield to assist the windshield
defroster. If this is done, the driver’s side grille should always be
returned to its normal position so that the warm air flow can then be
used to defrost the driver’s side window.
4
Climate control
4-3
– CONTINUED –
B Air flow selection
HB5006CA
HB5006BA
HB5006EA
HB5006DA
HB5006FA
4-4
Manual heating and air conditioning system
B Control panel
HB5004BC
1. Temperature control dial
2. Fan speed control dial
3. Air flow control dial
4. Air conditioner button
5. Air inlet selection button
6. Rear window defogger button (Refer to “Rear window defogger” in
chapter 3.)
n Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over
a range from the blue area (cool) to red area (warm).
n Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. The fan speed control dial is used to select four fan speeds.
n Air flow control dial
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot
outlets.
4
Climate control
4-5
– CONTINUED –
: Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the wind-
shield defroster outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.
NOTE
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or “ ”position, the air
conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the
position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield
quickly. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automatically
set to “Outside air” mode.
In this state, you cannot select “recirculation” mode by manually
pressing the air inlet selection button.
n Air conditioner button
HB5010BB
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on
the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
4-6
n Air inlet selection button
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON position may fog up the windows.
Switch to the OFF position as soon as the outside dusty condi-
tion clears.
HB5008BB
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air is recirculated inside the ve-
hicle. Push the air inlet selection button to the ON position. The indi-
cator light will come on.
OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment. Push the air inlet selection button again to the OFF
position. The indicator light will go off.
4
Climate control
4-7
– CONTINUED –
J Heater operation
B Defrosting or defogging the windshield
HB5011AA
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:
1. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
2. Turn the temperature control dial all the way to the right.
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the highest speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
B Heating and defrosting
HB5012AA
4-8
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:
1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
B Heating
HB5013AA
To direct warm air toward the floor:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” position
2 Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
NOTE
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To
stop warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding
thumb-wheel to the “
” position.
4
Climate control
4-9
– CONTINUED –
B Bi-level heating
HB5014AA
This setting allows you to direct air of different temperatures from the
instrument panel and foot outlets. The air from the foot outlets is
slightly warmer than from the instrument panel outlets.
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired temperature level.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue
area decreases the temperature difference between the air from the
instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
B Ventilation
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ON” position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the “OFF” position as soon as the outside dusty
condition clears.
4-10
HB5015AA
To force outside air through the instrument panel outlets:
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control lever to the “ON”
position.
J Air conditioner operation
B Cooling or dehumidifying
HB5016BB
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartment, air
flows through the instrument panel outlets:
4
Climate control
4-11
– CONTINUED –
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the “OFF” position.
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “
” position.
3. Set the air conditioner button to the “ON” position.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area.
5. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
B Defrosting or defogging
HB5011BB
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:
1. Set the air outlet control dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the red area.
3. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed.
4-12
Automatic climate control system (if equipped)
NOTE
D Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is
running.
D When the engine coolant is cold, for instance in cold weather, the
air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and the blower
runs at the lowest speed to prevent cold air from blowing directly
against the driver and front passenger.
D In the “AUTO” mode, if the air temperature in the passenger
compartment is cooled down to the specified temperature, the air
conditioner compressor stops automatically. For efficient defogging
or dehumidifying in cold weather, press the “A/C” switch on.
D Even when cooling is not necessary, setting the temperature
much lower than the current outlet air temperature turns on the air
conditioner compressor automatically and the “A/C” indicator light
on the control panel comes on.
The automatic climate control system automatically controls outlet air
temperature, fan speed, air flow distribution air-inlet control, and air con-
ditioner compressor operation. It activates when the “AUTO” switch is
pressed, and is used in conjunction with the Temperature control dial to
maintain a constant, comfortable climate within the passenger compart-
ment.
The temperature can be set within a range of 65 – 85°F (18 – 32°C).
NOTE
The temperature is shown in units of Fahrenheit for US model and in
Centigrade for Canadian model.
4
Climate control
4-13
– CONTINUED –
B Control panel
HB4031BC
1. AUTO switch
2. OFF switch/BRIGHT
3. Outside air temperature switch
4. Defroster switch
5. Rear window defogger switch (Refer to the “Rear window defog-
ger” in chapter 3.)
6. Fan speed control switch
7. Air conditioner switch
8. Air flow control switch
9. Air inlet selection switch
10. Temperature control dial
11. In-vehicle temperature sensor.
n AUTO switch
AUTO mode operation:
The Automatic Climate Control system automatically controls the air
temperature of the passenger compartment in the AUTO mode. When
the “AUTO” switch is pressed, the indicator light “AUTO” on the con-
trol panel comes on. In this state, outlet air temperature, fan speed, air
flow distribution, air-inlet control, and air conditioner compressor op-
eration are automatically controlled.
4-14
ECON (economy) mode:
When you press the “AUTO” switch while the system is in the AUTO
mode, it selects the ECON (economy) mode, turning on the
“
ECON
” indicator light. In the ECON mode, the compressor runs to
be thrifty with energy consumption. Interior windows tend to fog in this
energy-saving operation. It is therefore recommended that the AUTO
mode be used only in high humidity conditions.
Manual mode operation:
When the Automatic Climate Control system is operating in the AUTO
mode, pressing the “
”, “ ”, “MODE”, “A/C” or
“
” switch shifts the operation into the “MANUAL” mode and the
indicator light “AUTO” on the control panel will go out.
When the “
”, “ ”, “MODE”, “A/C” or “ ”
switch is pressed, the corresponding function can be controlled inde-
pendently, while automatic control of the other functions are main-
tained.
To change the system back to the AUTO mode, press the “AUTO”
switch.
n OFF switch
The Automatic Climate Control system turns off (the air conditioner
compressor and fan turn off) when the “OFF” switch is pressed.
When the “OFF” switch is pressed, the outside air introduction mode
(“
” position) is automatically selected.
NOTE
Display illumination dimness cancellation (BRIGHT):
Setting the light switch to the “p” or “a” position causes the
illuminating icons on the display panel to dim. When traveling
with the lights on in gloomy daylight or in twilight, press the OFF
switch for 1 second or longer if you feel it is too hard to identify
the icons clearly. The brightness comes back to normal.
If you wish to dim the icons again, hold down the OFF switch
again or if you can safely do so, turn the light switch OFF and
then place it in the “p” or “a” position.
4
Climate control
4-15
– CONTINUED –
n OUT.TEMP switch
To check the outside air temperature, push the “OUT.TEMP” switch.
The outside air temperature will be displayed for five seconds, and
then the display automatically changes back to the inside air temper-
ature.
The display changes over from the inside air temperature to the out-
side air temperature as its normal indication if you keep the switch
pressed for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE
D The outside air temperature display shows the outside air tem-
perature in a range from –22°F to 131°F (–30°C to 55°C).
D You can check the outside air temperature even when the Au-
tomatic Climate Control is off. (The ignition switch should be in
the “ON” position.)
D In the following cases, the display can indicate a higher tem-
perature than the actual outside air temperature:
– In direct sunlight
– When the vehicle is parked for a long period of time with the
engine kept running.
– During stop and go driving
n
— Defroster switch
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and side window, push the
defroster switch “
”. When the “ ” switch is pushed, re-
gardless whether the air conditioner is operating or not, outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment, the air conditioner compres-
sor turns on, air flow is directed towards the windshield and side win-
dows, and the indicator light “
” on the control panel comes on.
Even with the defroster switch pushed, you can turn the air condition-
er ON/OFF and select interior air recirculation or outside air introduc-
tion as desired.
After eliminating the fogging from the windshield, set the air condition-
er back in the AUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO” switch or turn off
by pushing the “OFF” switch or “
” switch.
4-16
n
— Fan speed control switch
HB5021BB
The fan speed control switch has the 5 positions: AUTO position and
4 different fan speed positions.
With the fan speed control switch in the AUTO position, the fan speed
changes automatically corresponding to various conditions: air tem-
perature inside and outside of the passenger compartment, intensity
of the sunlight, etc.
Use this switch to select desired fan speed. Fan speed increases with
each press of the switch and returns to the AUTO position.
n A/C — Air conditioner switch
NOTE
The air conditioner compressor does not operate when the out-
side air temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
If the windshield starts to fog when the air conditioner is operated in
the AUTO mode, push the air conditioner switch “A/C” to defog and
dehumidify.
When this switch is pushed, the air conditioner compressor turns on
and the indicator light “A/C” on the control panel comes on. After
eliminating the fogging from the windshield, set the air conditioner
back in the AUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO” switch.
4
Climate control
4-17
– CONTINUED –
n MODE — Air flow control switch
(Ventilation) : Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
(Bi-level) : Air flows through the instrument panel outlets
and the foot outlets.
(Heat) : Air flows through the foot outlets and some
through the windshield defroster outlets.
(Heat-def) : Air flows through the windshield defroster out-
lets and foot outlet.
NOTE
When the “ ” mode is selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air
conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to “
” mode.
Even with this mode selected, you can turn the air conditioner
ON/OFF and select interior air recirculation or outside air
introduction as desired.
n Air inlet selection switch
WARNING
Continued operation in the “ ” position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the “
” position as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
4-18
HB4032BB
Select the air inlet by pushing the air inlet selection switch.
: Interior air recirculates inside the passenger’s compartment.
Use this position when quickly warming up the passenger
compartment or cooling it down or when preventing outside
air from entering the passenger compartment from the out-
side air. The indicator light “
” on the control panel
comes on when this switch is pushed.
: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. When
the air conditioning system is operated in the “AUTO” mode,
this position is selected automatically. The indicator light
“
” on the control panel comes on when this switch is
pushed.
n Temperature control dial
HB4033BB
4
Climate control
4-19
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The temperature setting remains even after the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF”. However, if the battery cables are discon-
nected, the temperature will be set to 77°F (25°C) automatically.
Set desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial; turn
the dial clockwise to raise the temperature setting and turn it counter-
clockwise to lower it.
The temperature can be set in increments of 1°F within a range of 65
– 85°F for US models and in increments of 0.5°C within a range of 18
– 32°C for Canadian models.
Even when quick cooling or warming is necessary, you do not have to
change the temperature setting. The Automatic Climate Control sys-
tem operates at maximum performance until the air in the passenger
compartment reaches to the specified temperature.
B Temperature sensors
This Automatic Climate Control system employs the several sensors.
These are very delicate parts. Therefore, if these sensors are dam-
aged, it is possible that the Automatic Climate Control system will not
properly control the air temperature in the passenger compartment.
To prevent possible damage to the sensors, please observe the fol-
lowing:
– Do not allow anything to impact the sensors.
– Be careful not to let water contact the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are found at the following locations:
– Sun-load sensor (beside the windshield defroster grille)
– In-vehicle temperature sensor (beside the temperature control
dial.)
– Ambient sensor (at the under side of the bumper)
4-20
HB4034BBHB5024BB
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
B Cleaning ventilator grille
HB5019BC
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or oth-
er obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the
condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept
clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation
of insects and leaves on the condenser.
B Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few
minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This
results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows
4
Climate control
4-21
– CONTINUED –
closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cool-
ing efficiency.
B Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle
or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-sea-
son to circulate its oil.
B Checking air conditioning system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions,
and proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by
your SUBARU dealer.
B Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tempera-
ture weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low tempera-
tures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets
may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any
problem with the air conditioning system.
B Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily
loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner com-
pressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner op-
eration whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during
rapid accerelation or when driving on a steep upgrade.
B Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. There-
fore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is
different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong
refrigerant are not covered under warranty.
4-22
Air filtration system (if equipped)
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped with a optional air
filtration system, replace the filter element according to the replacement
schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the
filter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Since the filter element is a viscous
type, it is unnecessary to clean or wash the element. Have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 9,300 miles (15,000 km) whichever comes first
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster
performance if not properly maintained.
5
Audio
Antenna system 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio set 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type A and B audio set (if equipped) 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type C audio set (if equipped) 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
McIntosh audio set (if equipped) 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions to observe when handling
a compact disc (CD) 5-39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Antenna system
B Printed antenna
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the
antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on
the window.
The antenna is printed on the inside of the rear window glass (sedan)
or the left side rear quarter window glass (station wagon).
HB5038AA
HBF013IA
B Pillar mounted antenna
OM-H2376
Pull the antenna out to extend it to its full length.
5
Audio
5-3
– CONTINUED –
B FM reception
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the
surrounding area, atmospheric conditions, station strength and trans-
mitter distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause momentary
static, flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsat-
isfactory, switch to a stronger station.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band ra-
dio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause
the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly
installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets.
See the pages indicated in this section for operating details.
B Type A and type B audio set
HB5052AA
D Radio operation: refer to page 5-6
D CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-10
D CD changer control: refer to page 5-13
5-6
Type A and B audio set (if equipped)
Type A: Without weather band
Type B: With weather band
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
HB5052BB
1 Power switch/Volume, Tone,
Balance, Fader control dial
2 BAND button
3 Tuning buttons
4 Preset buttons
5 AUDIO button
6 SCAN button
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
n Power switch and volume control (PWR/VOL)
The dial
1 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
5
Audio
5-7
– CONTINUED –
n Tone and balance control (AUDIO)
The volume control dial
1 normally functions as a volume control.
This dial becomes a control for Bass, Treble, Fader or Balance when
you select the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
Choose desired volume level for each mode by turning the volume
control dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after
about 5 seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button
5 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from vol-
ume control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode
is in the volume control.)
Volume Bass Treble Balance Fader
(VOL) (BAS) (TRE) (BAL) (FAD)
The “AUDIO” button 5 is used for selecting the following control
modes:
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BAS Bass control For less bass For more bass
TRE Treble control For less treble For more treble
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease rear
speaker volume
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
5-8
B Waveband selection
n FM/AM selection
Push the “BAND” button
2 to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception. The
display indicates which one is currently selected.
n FM/AM/Weather band selection
Push the “BAND” button
2 to select FM1, FM2, AM or Weather band
(WB) reception. The display indicates which is currently selected.
B Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
B Tuning (TUNE)
n Manual tuning (TUNE)
Press the tuning button
3 marked “Y” to increase the tuning frequen-
cy and press the tuning button marked “B” to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency interval can be
changed between 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
frequency.
n Manual tuning for weather band
When weather band mode is selected, press the tuning button
3
marked “Y” to change the WB channel up and press the tuning but-
ton marked “B” to change the WB channel down. Each time the but-
ton is pressed, the WB channel changes to the next channel.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
frequency.
n Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
6 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
band has been scanned from the low end to the high end.
5
Audio
5-9
– CONTINUED –
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop
on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings
and hills.
B Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a “preset button”
4 allows you to select that
station in a single operation. Up to six WB (if equipped), AM, FM1 and
FM2 stations each may be preset.
B How to preset stations
1. Press the “BAND” button
2 to select FM1, FM2, AM or WB (if
equipped) reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button or tune the radio manually until the
desired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 2 seconds to store
the frequency. At this time, there will momentarily be no sound from
the radio. If the button is pressed for less than 2 seconds, the preced-
ing selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
5-10
Compact disc player operation
HB5052CB
7 Disc slot
8 CD button
9 Eject button
Q Fast forward and track up
button
W Fast reverse and track down
button
E Random button
R Repeat button
T Scan button
Y PWR (power) switch
B To playback a compact disc
n When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole while gripping the edge of
the disc, then insert it in to the slot (with the label side up) and the
player will automatically pull the disc into position.
A 8 cm/3 inch CD may also be used without any adapter.
NOTE
D DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE DISC INSERTION
SLOT AT A TIME.
D Be sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc
is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the
player might shut off.
D After the last song finishes, the player will automatically return
to track 1 (the first song on the disc).
5
Audio
5-11
– CONTINUED –
n When CD is in the player
When the “CD” button
8 is pressed, the player will start playback.
NOTE
After the last song finishes, the player will automatically return to
track 1 (the first song on the disc).
B To stop playback of a CD
When the “PWR” button
Y is pressed during playback of a CD, the
CD stops playing temporarily. To let the CD resume playing, press the
button again.
B To select a song from its beginning
n Forward direction
Briefly press the “Y” button
Q to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
n Backward direction
Briefly press the “B” button
W to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated truck number will
decrease.
B Fast forwarding and fast reverse
n Fast forward
Press the “Y” button
Q continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast
forward the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding.
n Fast reverse
Press the “B” button
W continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast
reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast reverse.
B Repeat playback
Use this to play a certain track repeatedly. During playback, press the
“RPT” button
R and release it in less than 2 seconds. The “RPT” indi-
cator will come on and the song will be played continuously. To can-
5-12
cel the repeat mode, press the button again. Then the “RPT” indicator
goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Random playback
Use this to play the tracks on the disc in random order. During play-
back, press the “RDM” button
E and hold it in for more than 2 se-
conds. The “RDM” indicator will come on and all songs on the disc
will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the “RDM”
indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan
Press the “SCAN” button
T and release it in less than 2 seconds, and
you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to seach for the
desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the
“SCAN” button again. After all tracks on the disc has been scanned,
normal playback mode is restored.
B To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when a disc is in the player,
press the eject button “
” 9. The disc will be ejected.
The disc may be removed even when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position.
NOTE
D Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because
vibration might make it fall out.
D To protect the disc, the disc is automatically loaded if it is left
in the ejected position for more than approximately 15 seconds
(Auto Reload). In this case, the disc is not played.
5
Audio
5-13
– CONTINUED –
CD changer control (If optional in dash CD changer is
connected)
An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. See your
SUBARU dealer for more information. For procedures for loading and un-
loading CDs, refer to “In-dash 6 CD auto changer” in this chapter.
HB5052DB
U CD button
I Track selection buttons
O RAND (Random) button
P RPT (Repeat) button
A SCAN button
B To start playback
Press the “CD” button
U. The “CD” indicator will come on and the
disc number will appear on the display and the CD changer will start
playback.
NOTE
D If the “CD” button is pressed during a radio broadcast, the CD
changer will interrupt the broadcast.
D At the end of the disc, playback automatically continues with
the next disc.
D After playback on the last disc finishes, the player will auto-
matically return to the first disc.
D If you have loaded fewer than 6 discs, any missing disc is
automatically skipped.
5-14
B Selection of a desired disc
Discs cannot be selected using the main audio unit. To select a disc,
press one of the “Disc select” buttons (these are numbered from 1 to
6) on the CD changer unit. The disc will begin to play.
B To select a song from its beginning
Briefly press the “Y” button
I to skip to the beginning of the next
track and briefly press the “B” button to skip to the beginning of the
current track.
B Fast-forwarding and fast-reverse
Press the “Y” button
I continuously for more than a half second to
fast-forward the disc.
Press the “B” button continuously for more than a half second to fast
reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast forwarding or fast reverse.
B Repeat
Press the “RPT” button
P while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
B Random playback
Press the “RAND” button
O while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RAND” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the
“RAND” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan (a convenient way to become familiar with a disc)
1. Press the “SCAN” button
A.
– The display shows “SCAN” and the track number being
scanned.
– You hear the first 10 seconds of each track.
– The operation is automatically cleared after playing all pro-
grams. Then, normal playback starts.
5
Audio
5-15
– CONTINUED –
2. Press the “SCAN” button again when you hear a track you like.
– Normal playback resumes.
B To stop playback
To stop playback and switch over to the radio mode, press the
“BAND” button.
5-16
Type C audio set (if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Radio operation
HB5064BB
1 Power switch, Volume control,
Bass/Middle/Treble control and
Fader/Balance control dial
2 AUDIO (audio mode) button
3 Fader/Balance selection
button
4 FM/AM selection button
5 WB (weather band) button
6 Preset buttons
7 Tuning buttons
8 SCAN button
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
(PWR/VOL)
The dial
1 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
5
Audio
5-17
– CONTINUED –
This dial is used for bass/middle/treble controls when the “AUDIO”
button
2 is in the depressed position. It is also used for fader/balance
controls when the “BAL” button
3 is in the depressed position.
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BASS Bass control For less bass For more bass
MIDDLE Middle note
control
For less middle note For more middle note
TREBLE Treble control For less treble For more treble
FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease
front speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease
rear speaker volume
BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease
right speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume
n Tone control
The volume control dial
1 normally function as volume control. The
dial become a control for Bass, Middle note or Treble when you select
the appropriate tone control mode.
Choose desired level for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “AUDIO” button
2 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from
bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control
mode is in the volume control.)
5-18
Bass Middle Treble Volume
(BASS) (MIDDLE) (TREBLE) (VOLUME)
n Fader and balance control
The volume control dial
1 normally function as volume control. The
dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the
appropriate fader and balance control mode.
Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “BAL” button
3
changes control modes in the following sequence starting from fader
control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is in the
volume control.)
Fader Balance Volume
(FADER) (BALANCE) (VOLUME)
n Display illumination dimness cancellation (BRIGHT)
The brightness of the radio display dims when the light switch is in the
“p” or “w” positions. If this makes the display difficult to read,
press the volume dial for more than 1.5 seconds to return the display
to original brightness.
Subsequently pressing the volume dial again for more than 1.5
seconds or if you can safely do so, turning the light switch to the OFF
position and back to the “p” or “w” position makes the radio dis-
play dim again.
B FM/AM selection button (FM/AM)
Push the “FM/AM” button
4 when the radio is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM/AM” button when the radio is on to select FM1, FM2 or
AM reception. Each time this button is pressed, the band will change
in the following order:
5
Audio
5-19
– CONTINUED –
FM1 FM2 AM
The display indicates which one is currently selected.
B Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast
is received.
B Weather band button (WB)
Push the “WB” button
5 when the radio is off to turn on the radio in
the weather band.
Press the “WB” button when the radio is on to select the weather
band.
B Manual tuning (TUNE)
n Manual tuning for AM and FM waveband
Push the tuning button
7 marked “Y” to increase the tuning frequen-
cy and press the tuning button marked “B” to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency changes 10 KHz in the
AM waveband and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
frequency.
n Manual tuning for weather band
When weather band mode is selected, press the tuning button
7
marked “Y” to change the WB channel up and press the tuning but-
ton marked “B” to change the WB channel down. Each time the but-
ton is pressed, the WB channel changes to the next channel.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the
channel.
B Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
8 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
5-20
band has been scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop
on any displayed frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
B Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
6 allows you to select that
station in a single operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and WB stations
each may be preset.
B How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM/AM” selection button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 re-
ception.
OR
Press the “WB” button
5 to select the weather band.
2. Press the “SCAN” button
8 or tune the radio manually until the de-
sired station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons
6 for at least 1.5 seconds to store
the frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the dis-
play at this time. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the
preceding selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
5
Audio
5-21
– CONTINUED –
Built-in CD changer operation
HB5064CB
9 Eject button
Q Disc slot
W CD (CD player selection)
button
E Repeat button
R Random button
T LOAD button
Y Disc select buttons
U Track selection buttons
I SCAN button
NOTE
Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc is
inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player
might shut off.
B How to insert a CD(s)
n Inserting a CD
1. Press “LOAD” button
E. If the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated
with the idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the mag-
azine.
2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator begins to blink, the “IN” will ap-
5-22
pear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the
period. The disc will be then automatically drawn in, and the player
will begin to play back the first number of the disc.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. The
magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position
number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the
“LOAD” button, the player will begin to play back the first number of
the last disc you have inserted.
D The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in
the corresponding position of the magazine.
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the “FM/AM”
selection button
4, the player will enter the standby mode. Press the
“CD” button
W to start playback.
n Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated
with the idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up
are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
Y at the position where you want
to insert a disc. The associated “DISC” indicator will blink, and the
“IN” will be displayed.
3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period while the “IN” is on
display, the disc will be automatically drawn in, and the player will
start playback of the disc, beginning with the first number.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press the “FM/AM”
selection button
4, the player will enter standby mode. Press the
“CD” button to start playback.
n Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button for more than 1.5 se-
conds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc
loading mode.
2. A “DISC” indicator will blink, and the “IN” will be on display for a
5
Audio
5-23
– CONTINUED –
period of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully loaded during this peri-
od, the “DISC” indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next “DISC” indicator
will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3,
the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one in-
serted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15-second interval, the full
disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback
of the disc inserted first.
B How to play back a CD or make a pause
n When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to Insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, begin-
ning with the first number.
n When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “DISC SELECT” buttons
Y the “DISC” indi-
cator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of
the selected CD, beginning with the first number.
B To select a song from its beginning
n Forward direction
Briefly press the “
∧” button U to skip to the beginning of the next
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
n Backward direction
Briefly press the “
∨” button U to skip to the beginning of the current
track. Each time the button is pressed, the indicated truck number will
decrease.
B Fast forwarding and fast reverse
n Fast forwarding
Press the “
∧” button U continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast
forward the disc.
5-24
Release the button to stop fast forwarding.
n Fast reverse
Press the “
∨” button U continuously for more than 0.5 second to fast
reverse the disc.
Release the button to stop fast reverse.
B Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button
E while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
B Random playback
Press the “RAND” button
R while a disc is being played back to play
all songs on the disc in a random order. The “RAND” indicator will
come on and all songs on the disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel the random mode, press the button again. Then the
“RAND” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode is restored.
B Scan
When the “SCAN” button
I is pressed while the disc is being played
back, you can hear the first 10 seconds of each track to seach for the
desired program. To continue listening to the program, press the
“SCAN” button again. After all tracks on the disc have been scanned,
normal playback mode is restored.
B How to unload CDs from the player
n Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc.
1. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
Y of the disc whose “DISC” indi-
cator is ON.
2. Press the “EJECT” button
9. Then the “DISC” indicator associated
with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
5
Audio
5-25
– CONTINUED –
n Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)
1. If you continue to press the “EJECT” button
9, the player will pro-
duce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded
will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the disc
that has been ejected, the “All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibra-
tion might make it fall out.
OnStar system operation (models with OnStar sys-
tem)
When the OnStar system operates and a call is initiated, the message
“CALL” will be shown on the display, and the speakers will automatically
switch over to the incoming voice signal.
NOTE
A call will not be suspended even if the ignition key is turned to the
Off position. In such a case, however, the audio system will turn off
when the call is ended.
5-26
McIntosh audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” positions.
CAUTION
The power amplifier for this audio set is mounted under the front
passenger’s seat. The amplifier will become hot if the audio con-
tinues to operate.
Never touch the amplifier. Doing so could cause burns.
Radio operation
HB5063BB
1 FM/AM selection button
2 Weather band button
3 Tuning/FF⋅FB dial
4 SCAN button
5 Preset buttons
6 Fader/Balance control
button
7 Power switch, Volume
control, Bass/Treble control
and Fader/Balance control
dial
8 Bass/Treble sound control
button
5
Audio
5-27
– CONTINUED –
B Power switch and volume/bass/treble/fader/balance control
(ON/VOL)
The dial
1 is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The
radio is turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial and the volume is
controlled by turning the dial.
This dial is used for bass/treble controls when the “BASS/TREB” but-
ton
8 is in the depressed position. It is also used for fader/balance
controls when the “FAD/BAL” button
6 is in the depressed position.
Display Control mode
HB5036BA
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
BASS Bass control For less bass For more bass
TREB Treble control For less treble For more treble
FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker
volume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker
volume and decrease rear
speaker volume
BAL Balance control To increase left speaker
volume and decrease right
speaker volume
To increase right speaker
volume and decrease left
speaker volume
VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume
n Tone control
The volume control dial
7 normally function as volume control. The
dial become a control for Bass or Treble when you select the ap-
propriate tone control mode.
Choose desired level for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
5-28
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “BASS/TREB” but-
ton 8 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from
bass control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control
mode is in the volume control.)
Bass Treble Volume
(BASS) (TREB) (VOL)
n Fader and balance control
The volume control dial
7 normally function as volume control. The
dial become the controls for Fader or Balance when you select the
appropriate fader and balance control mode.
Choose desired setting for each mode by turning the volume control
dial. The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5
seconds.
To change control modes: Each brief press of the “FAD/BAL” button
6 changes control modes in the following sequence starting from
fader control mode. (When the radio is turned on, the control mode is
in the volume control.)
Fader Balance Volume
(FAD) (BAL) (VOL)
n Display illumination dimness cancellation (BRIGHT)
The brightness of the radio display dims when the light switch is in the
“p” or “w” positions. If this makes the display difficult to read,
press the dial
7 for more than two seconds to return the display to
original brightness.
Subsequently pressing the dial
7 again for more than two seconds or
if you can safely do so, turning the light switch to the OFF position
and back to the “p” or “w” position makes the radio display dim
again.
5
Audio
5-29
– CONTINUED –
B FM/AM selection button
Press the “FM/AM” selection button
1 to choose either FM or AM
broadcasts. The display will show FM or AM accordingly.
Use the tuning dial to select the station to which you wish to listen.
B Manual tuning
Turn the tuning dial
3 outer tuner to increase or decrease the recep-
tion frequency in individual steps.
FM band: 0.2 MHz steps
AM band: 10 kHz steps
B Seek tuning (SEEK)
If the Tuning dial
3 outer tuner is turned for longer than half of a se-
cond, the radio will begin to automatically search for receivable fre-
quencies and will stop at the first one found. This function may not be
available, however, when radio signals are weak. In such a situation,
perform manual tuning to select the desired station.
B Scan tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button
4 to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In
this mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is
found. The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while display-
ing the frequency, after which scanning will continue until the entire
band has been scanned.
Turn the tuning dial
3 inner tuner again to cancel the SCAN mode
and to stop on any displayed frequency.
Scan tuning may not function properly if the station reception is weak-
ened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
B Preset tuning
Press any one of the preset buttons
5 to select the corresponding,
previously-registered radio station. The LED at the top of that button
will turn on.
n Manual preset
D Use the tuning dial
3 to select the radio station which you wish to
register.
5-30
D Choose the preset button
5 to which you wish to assign that sta-
tion and press it continuously for a period of more than 2 seconds.
When the radio station has been successfully registered, the display
will flash the corresponding radio frequency on and off once.
NOTE
D Each preset button can be used to store both an FM station
and an AM station.
D If the power supply is interrupted by disconnection of the bat-
tery, memory presets will be cleared and will be required to be re-
input.
B Weather band button (WB)
Push the “WB” button
2 when the radio is off to turn on the radio in
the weather band.
Press the “WB” button
2 when the radio is on to select the weather
band.
5
Audio
5-31
– CONTINUED –
Built-in CD changer operation
HB5063CB
9 DISC IN indicator light
Q Disc slot
W Eject button
E LOAD button
R Repeat button
T FF·FB dial
Y Disc button
U Disc select button
NOTE
D Single CDs (i.e., 8-cm/3-inch CDs) are not supported, and if in-
serted, they will be immediately ejected.
D Make sure to always insert a disc with the label side up. If a disc
is inserted with the label side down, it might be ejected or the player
might shut off.
D If a disc is inserted during a radio broadcast, the disc will inter-
rupt the broadcast.
D After the last song finishes, the disc will automatically return to
track 1 (the first song on the disc) and will automatically play back.
5-32
B How to insert a CD(s)
n Inserting a CD
1. Press “LOAD” button
E. If the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator associated
with the idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is no idle position in the mag-
azine.
2. As soon as the “DISC” indicator begins to blink, the “CD-IN” will
appear on display for a period of 15 seconds. Insert a disc during the
period. The disc will be then automatically drawn in, and the player
will begin to play back the first number of the disc.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. The
magazine will be loaded with discs in the ascending order of position
number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds after you have pressed the
“LOAD” button
E, the player will begin to play back the first number
of the last disc you have inserted.
D The disc indicator steadily lights up if a disc is already inserted in
the corresponding position of the magazine.
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press “FM/AM”
selection button
1, the player will enter the standby mode. Press the
“Disc” button
Y to start playback.
n Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Press the “LOAD” button
E. If the magazine in the player has an
idle position where you can insert a disc, the “DISC” indicator
associated with the idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indicator of which steadily lights up
are already loaded with discs.
2. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
U at the position where you want
to insert a disc. The associated “DISC” indicator will blink, and the
“CD-IN” will be displayed.
3. If you insert a disc during the 15-second period while the “IN” is on
display, the disc will be automatically drawn in, and the player will
start playback of the disc, beginning with the first number.
D To insert more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
5
Audio
5-33
– CONTINUED –
D While the player is in the loading mode, if you press FM/AM selec-
tion button, the player will enter standby mode. Press the “DISC” but-
ton to start playback.
n Loading all the magazine (Full disc loading mode)
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” button
E for more than 1.5 se-
conds, the player will produce beep sound and will enter the full disc
loading mode.
2. A “DISC” indicator will blink, and the “CD-IN” will be on display for
a period of 15 seconds. If a disc is successfully loaded during this
period, the “DISC” indicator will stop blinking and will steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is complete, the next “DISC” indicator
will blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs by repeating Steps 2 and 3,
the player will start playback of the discs, beginning with the one in-
serted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15-second interval, the full
disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback
of the disc inserted first.
B How to play back a CD or make a pause
n When there is no CD inserted:
Insert a CD by referring to “How to Insert a CD(s)”.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, begin-
ning with the first number.
n When there are CDs loaded:
Press a desired one of the “DISC SELECT” buttons
U the “DISC” indi-
cator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start playback of
the selected CD, beginning with the first number.
5-34
B Selecting a desired track (TRACK)
HB5065BA
n Skipping forward
Turn the FF·FB dial
T clockwise and release it immediately to skip to
the beginning of the next track. Each time the knob is turned and re-
leased, the indicated track number will increase.
n Skipping backward
Turn the FF·FB dial
T counterclockwise and release it immediately to
skip to the beginning of the current track. If you continue to turn and
release the knob, the indicated truck number will decrease.
n Fast forwarding
Turn the FF·FB dial
T clockwise and hold it continuously for more than
0.5 second to fast forward the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast forwarding.
n Fast reversing
Turn the FF·FB dial
T counterclockwise and hold it continuously for
more than 0.5 second to fast reverse the disc.
Release the knob to stop fast reverse.
B Repeat playback
Press the “RPT” button
R while a song is playing to play the song
repeatedly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and the song will be
played continuously. To cancel the repeat mode, press the button
again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and normal playback mode
is restored.
""❚ : Skipping forward
❚AA : Skipping backward
"" : Fast forwarding
AA : Fast reversing
5
Audio
5-35
– CONTINUED –
B How to unload CDs from the player
n Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc.
1. Press the “DISC SELECT” button
U of the disc whose “DISC” indi-
cator is ON.
2. Press the “EJECT” button
W. Then the “DISC” indicator associated
with the disc you have selected will blink, and the disc will be ejected.
To remove more discs in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
n Ejecting all discs from the player (All disc ejection mode)
1. If you continue to press the “EJECT” button
W, the player will pro-
duce beep sound and will enter the all disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded
will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the disc
that has been ejected, the “All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibra-
tion might make it fall out.
OnStar system operation (models with OnStar sys-
tem)
When the OnStar system operates and a call is initiated, the message
”PHONE” will be shown on the display, and the speakers will automati-
cally switch over to the incoming voice signal.
NOTE
A call will not be suspended even if the ignition key is turned to the
Off position. In such a case, however, the audio system will turn off
when the call is ended.
5-36
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)
HB5040BB
1 Disc slot
2 Disc indicators (disc No.1 to
6)
3 Disc select buttons
(disc No.1 to 6)
4 Eject button
CAUTION
D Do not attempt to insert two or more discs into the slot at a
time. Doing so can cause mechanical damage to the CD changer.
D Use only music CDs identified by a
mark.
D Do not use CDs listed below which could cause damage to the
CD player.
D 3-inch (8 cm) compact disc.
D Any disc with a peel-off or seal on it.
D Any disc with scratches and/or dust.
D Bent disc.
D Cleaning disc.
D CD accessory. (E.g., 3-inch (8 cm) disc adapter)
D Do not insert or remove any disc when the automatic transmis-
sion selector lever is in the park position; the selector lever in
that position can interfere with disc insertion or removal, causing
scratches on the disc surface (for AT vehicles).
5
Audio
5-37
– CONTINUED –
B To insert a disc
1. Press one of the “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered from 1 to 6)
for which the disc indicator light
2 is “OFF”.
The Disc indicator lights are located directly above the corresponding
“Disc select” buttons.
2. The indicator will begin blinking. The blinking will last for 15 se-
conds.
During this period, insert a desired disc, and the disc will begin to
play. (If any disc is not inserted during this period, the “Disc slot”
1
door will close. Repeat step 1.)
Be sure to hold a disc with the label side (the side where titles are
printed) up.
3. To insert another disc, repeat step 1 and 2 choosing a different
disc select button.
B To insert six discs at a time
1. Press and hold the “Disc select” button number 1 until all disc indi-
cators begin blinking (about 1.5 seconds).
2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds. During this period, insert
desired six discs.
3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc will begin to play. (If no
disc is inserted within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load sequence
will be canceled.)
B To remove a disc
1. Press the desired one of the “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered
from 1 to 6) for which the disc indicator light is on.
2. Press the “Eject button”
4. The selected disc will be ejected and
the indicator light will begin blinking.
3. To remove another disc, repeat step 1 and 2 choosing a different
“Disc select” button.
(To remove discs when the ignition switch is in the “Lock” position,
press the “Eject” button, and the first disc will be ejected. Press the
“Eject” button again, and the next disc will be ejected and so on. At
this time, the “Disc select” buttons are disabled.)
5-38
B To remove all discs at one time
1. Press and hold the “Eject” button 4 until all “Disc” indicators begin
blinking (about 1.5 seconds), and the first disc will be ejected.
2. When the disc is removed, the next one will be ejected, and so on.
B To replace a playing disc with another
Simply press the desired one of “Disc select” buttons
3 (numbered
from 1 to 6) or press the “DISC UP” or “DISC DOWN” button on the
radio unit to select the desired disc, and the disc will begin to play.
B Disc indicators
Lit: when the corresponding storage tray is occupied by a disc.
Blinking: Disc player is either in loading, eject or changing mode.
OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
B Function control
Refer to CD player control operating instructions described in the
“Type A and B audio sets” or “Type C audio set” section.
55
Audio
5-39
– CONTINUED –
Precautions to observe when handling a compact
disc (CD)
Use only compact discs (CDs) that have the mark shown below. CD-
RWs cannot be used. Also, some CD-Rs cannot be played.
HB5062AA
D In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside the CD player, pre-
venting normal operation. If this happens, eject the CD and wait for the
player to dry out.
D Skipping may occur when the CD player is subjected to severe vibra-
tion (for example, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface).
D To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold
both edges of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamina-
tion could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface.
D Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are deposits, wipe the
disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to
use a hard cloth, thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.
D Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do
not use any disc that has a non-standard shape (for example, a heart
shape). Malfunctions or problems might result.
D A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to
direct sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or hot days.
5-40
HB5061BA
6
Interior equipment
Interior light 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome light 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo area light (if equipped) 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map light (if equipped) 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror (if equipped) 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center console 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin compartment 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console (if equipped) 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter socket (if equipped) 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar system (if equipped) 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar subscription plans 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar services 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar personal calling 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar virtual advisor 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar system limitations 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory power outlet 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience hook 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat (if equipped) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover (if equipped) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subfloor storage (if equipped) 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Interior light
J Dome light
HS6003BC
The dome light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
DOOR (middle position): The light comes on when any of the doors (or
the rear gate on the wagon) is opened. The light remains on for several
seconds and gradually goes out after all doors (and the rear gate on the
wagon) are closed.
The light also can be turned on by use of the keyless entry transmitter.
See the “Keyless entry system” in chapter 2 for detailed information.
OFF: The light stays off.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light goes out to avoid battery
discharge.
6
Interior equipment
6-3
– CONTINUED –
J Cargo area light (if equipped)
HB0377
ON
DOOR
OFF
Cargo area light
The cargo area light switch has three positions:
ON: The light stays on continuously.
OFF: The light stays off.
DOOR: The light comes on only when the rear gate is opened.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
Map light (if equipped)
HB2006CCHB2034CC
6-4
HB6006BC
To turn on the map light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
Sun visors
HB7001BA
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side
window, swing it down and move it sideways.
6
Interior equipment
6-5
– CONTINUED –
J Vanity mirror (if equipped)
HB6017AA
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sunvisor and open the vanity
mirror cover.
B Vanity mirror with light (if equipped)
The light beside the vanity mirror comes on when the ignition switch is
either in the “ACC” or “ON” position and the mirror cover is opened.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
D Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an acci-
dent.
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart-
ment.
6-6
J Glove box
HS0090
Unlock
Lock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly
upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clockwise.
J Center console
HB6022BA
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
If the console lid is fully opened when a large cup is put in the rear pas-
senger’s cup holder, the lid may hit the cup and beverage may be
spilled.
6
Interior equipment
6-7
– CONTINUED –
J Coin compartment
HS0096
To open the coin compartment, pull the upper edge of the lid.
J Overhead console (if equipped)
CAUTION
When your vehicle is parked in the sun or a warm day, the inside
of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other
heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the
overhead console.
HB0269
To open the console, push on the lid lightly and it will automatically open.
6-8
Cup holder
CAUTION
D Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the
holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
D Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery,
carpets or audio equipment.
B Front cup holder
HB6023BA
A dual cup holder is built in the center console, beside the parking
brake lever.
6
Interior equipment
6-9
– CONTINUED –
B Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped)
HB6024BAHB7009CA
The rear passenger’s cup holder is located on the lower side of the
back of the center console. To use the cup holder, open the lid by
pulling its upper edge.
Cigarette lighter socket (if equipped)
CAUTION
D The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrument panel is originally designed to use a SUBARU genuine
cigarette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter
plugs in the socket. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and over-
heating, resulting in a fire.
D If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a
mobile phone, they may damage the portion of the socket’s inter-
nal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a ciga-
rette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential fire hazard.
D Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such
as coins or aluminum foil, into the socket. That could cause a
short circuit.
6-10
HB6011BA
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument
panel can be used as cigarette lighter socket. A cigarette lighter plug is
an optional accessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter socket may also be used as a power source for an
in-car use electrical appliance.
B Use with a cigarette lighter
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with
the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could
also damage the heating element.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.
6
Interior equipment
6-11
– CONTINUED –
HB6011DA
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” and “ACC” positions.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments.
It will automatically spring up when ready for use.
B Using as an accessory power outlet
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at the socket
when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
If you use the socket as an accessory power outlet, take the following
precautions.
When the socket is not in use, always put the cap on the socket to
prevent any foreign object from entering it.
CAUTION
D Use only in-car use electrical appliances which are designed
for 12V DC and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the
socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical appliance.
D If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the socket, this can result in a poor contact or cause the
plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
D Use of an electric appliance in the socket for a long period of
time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
D Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the
cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shift-
6-12
ing gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.
If the socket has been used for electrical appliances, damage may
have been done to the internal mechanism that cause a cigarette
lighter to “pop-out” after its element has been heated. For that reason,
a cigarette lighter, even if it is a genuine part, should not be used in
the socket. If you want to use the socket for a cigarette lighter again,
or to protect your purchaser before you sell your car, have your
SUBARU dealer replace the socket with a new one.
Ashtray
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted ciga-
rette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.
HB7009BAHB6011CA
B Front ashtray
To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.
B Rear ashtray (if equipped)
The rear ashtray is located on the upper side of the back of the center
console. To open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of the lid.
6
Interior equipment
6-13
– CONTINUED –
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while pushing
the inner plate down.
OnStar system (if equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of ser-
vices. OnStar provides a one-touch hands-free communication link be-
tween you and the OnStar Center, and allows you to make and receive
personal calls as well. To receive OnStar services, a service subscription
agreement is required and an additional fee may be required. Services
are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information, call
1-888-ONSTAR7 (888-667-8277).
HB6027BB
B OnStar services button
Press this button, and you will be connected to an OnStar Advisor.
You will hear a chime, followed by the words “Connecting to OnStar”.
The connection process will normally take about 15 seconds. Your
system is equipped with backup connection retry capabilities. If you
do not immediately connect to OnStar, DO NOT DISCONNECT. A se-
ries of retry attempts will be made automatically. If you wish to cancel
your call to the OnStar center, simply press the OnStar Communica-
tion button.
B OnStar emergency button
In an emergency, press this button to connect with an OnStar Advisor.
1 Emergency button
2 OnStar service button
3 Communication button
4 System status light
6-14
Your call will be given the highest priority, and you will hear a chime
followed by the words “Connecting to OnStar Emergency.” The Advi-
sor will attempt to locate your vehicle, find out what kind of assistance
you require, and contact a nearby emergency services provider who
can dispatch ambulance, fire, police or other emergency services.
Please use this button only for true emergencies. If you press this but-
ton by mistake, please stay on the line and tell the advisor that there
is no emergency.
B OnStar communication button (White DOT)
Press this button at the end of a call. You’ll hear the words “OnStar
Request Ended.” Also, press this button to answer a call from the
OnStar Center, or cancel a call if one of the other buttons is acciden-
tally pressed. This button is also used to access OnStar Personal
Calling and Virtual Advisor services, if those services have been acti-
vated.
B System status light
D Solid green – Indicates the OnStar system in the vehicle is pow-
ered ON and ready to make or receive calls.
D Blinking green – The light blinks green to indicate a call is being
connected or in progress. If you notice this light blinking while you are
not on a call, press the OnStar Communication (white dot) button.
D Red – This signals that your OnStar system may not be functioning
properly. Press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an OnStar ad-
visor. If the connection is made, the advisor will assist you in making
sure your OnStar system is operating properly. If you cannot contact
the OnStar Center, please take your vehicle to the nearest Subaru
dealership for diagnosis and service.
B Volume control
You can control the volume of the OnStar System using the volume
control knob on the radio.
J OnStar subscription plans*
B The OnStar safe & sound plan
Choose this plan for excellent protection, 24/7, 365 days a year. It in-
6
Interior equipment
6-15
– CONTINUED –
cludes valuable services such as Automatic Notification of Air Bag
Deployment, Remote Door Unlock** and Online Concierge services,
to name just a few!
B The OnStar directions & connections plan
This plan features all of the Safe & Sound services, plus Route Sup-
port, RideAssist and Information and Convenience services.
B The OnStar luxury & leisure plan
This plan features all of the Directions & Connections features, plus
fee-free OnStar MED-NET and the luxury of Personal Concierge ser-
vices.
* One of these plans is normally included for a specific duration with each ve-
hicle at time of purchase. Check with your dealership or with your OnStar advi-
sor to determine which plan is included with your vehicle. Services within plans
are subject to change. Please check our website at www.onstar.com
for ser-
vices included in each plan.
** Remote door unlock capabilities vary by vehicle
J OnStar services
The following services are available within OnStar service plans. Your ve-
hicle comes with a specific one-year service plan that allows use of
some or all of the following services.
B Automatic notification of air bag deployment
Should your air bag deploy, a priority signal will be sent to the OnStar
Center with your vehicle’s location (as long as cellular service and the
vehicle’s electrical system are operable). An advisor will attempt to
contact you to assess the nature of your emergency, and then notify
the necessary emergency services provider.
B Emergency services
Should you require emergency assistance, press the OnStar Emer-
gency button and we will contact a nearby emergency services pro-
vider with your exact location and your request for help.
B Roadside assistance***
There’s nothing worse than being stranded on the road with car
trouble. No matter what the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine
6-16
trouble), just call OnStar. We will contact your vehicle manufacturer’s
roadside service provider for the help you need to get you quickly
back on the road.
*** There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as long as the basic lim-
ited warranty on your vehicle has not expired.
B Stolen vehicle location
OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects your vehicle, too. If your
vehicle is ever stolen, just contact OnStar. We will put you in touch
with the authorities and aid them in locating your vehicle. Ask your in-
surance carrier about possible premium discounts.
B AccidentAssist
AccidentAssist provides step-by-step guidance about what to do in
case of an accident. Working with leading insurance companies we
have developed a “best practices” list to assist you through most ac-
cident situations. OnStar AccidentAssist can make the process of
completing a police report and/or insurance claim less stressful.
B Remote door unlock/vehicle alert
If you’ve locked your keys in your vehicle, just call OnStar at
1-888-466-7827 (888-4ONSTAR) and an Advisor will send a signal to
attempt to unlock your door. If you’re having trouble locating your ve-
hicle, OnStar can flash your lights and sound your horn for you. This
feature is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked in order to
maintain battery charge.
B OnStar MED-NET****
OnStar MED-NET securely stores your personal medical information
(e.g., physician’s name, emergency contacts, medications, chronic
conditions) and in an emergency, can quickly send it to a medical fa-
cility. This important information can help assist with diagnosis and
treatment.
**** Requires activation and additional fee for Safe & Sound and Directions &
Connections subscribers. To enroll or for more OnStar Med-Net information,
call 1-800-320-3991.
6
Interior equipment
6-17
– CONTINUED –
B Route support
With OnStar Route Support, an Advisor can help you find your way, no
matter how far off course you are. You can get exact street directions,
or guidance to nearby gas stations, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.
B RideAssist
If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night, just call OnStar. We’ll
contact a transportation provider and send them right to you.
B Information and convenience services
Our Advisors have access to over six million service listings including
hotels, restaurants, gas stations, dealerships, hospitals, ATMs and air-
ports – more than 250 service categories in all. Our Advisors can
even assist you with hotel and restaurant reservations.
B OnStar concierge
Safe & Sound, Directions & Connections and Luxury and Leisure plan
subscribers can access self-serve Online Concierge services for
event tickets, dining reservations, gift recommendations and more at
www.myonstar.com
.
Luxury & Leisure subscribers have access to Personal Concierge ser-
vices. A Concierge Advisor can help you with virtually any type of re-
quest via email, live chat, phone (1-888-4ONSTAR) or the blue button
in your vehicle. Just ask!
J OnStar personal calling
As an OnStar subscriber, you have access to OnStar Personal Calling (if
available in your area). OnStar Personal Calling provides you with a na-
tionwide wireless phone service that is completely integrated in your ve-
hicle. OnStar Personal Calling operates with the touch of a button and a
few simple voice commands. All it takes to get started is a package of
OPC minutes.
With OnStar Personal Calling, you can enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch
wireless connection. Whether you are placing or receiving a call, once
you press the white dot button, you don’t have to take your hands off the
wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of the hands-free wireless
6-18
communication service allows you to enjoy an even greater level of safe-
ty, security and convenience while driving.
J OnStar virtual advisor
As an OnStar Personal Calling subscriber, you can make your driving
time more enjoyable and productive with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. With
OnStar Virtual Advisor you can now listen to your favorite financial in-
formation, news, entertainment and information topics, such as stock
quotes , weather reports and sports scores. You can receive your email,
listen to it being read and reply, without taking your hands off the wheel
or eyes off the road. With the press of the white DOT button and a few
simple voice commands, you can browse the pre-selected topics from
your profile which you established on the MyOnStar website, or you can
skip to the subjects that interest you.
To find out more about Virtual Advisor or to set-up your Virtual Advisor
personal profile, visit www.myonstar.com
.
J OnStar system limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber Services Agree-
ment at www.onstar.com
.
An OnStar Service Subscription Agreement is required in order to re-
ceive OnStar services, including OnStar Personal Calling and OnStar
Virtual Advisor.
OnStar services require vehicle electrical system and wireless service to
be available and operating for features to function properly. OnStar uses
existing emergency service providers as well as wireless and satellite
technologies.
In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with the OnStar Cen-
ter may be monitored or recorded.
OnStar Service is:
D available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska and Hawaii;
D available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular
provider;
6
Interior equipment
6-19
– CONTINUED –
D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions, such as se-
vere weather or topographical conditions, such as mountainous terrain;
D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning locating capabilities will not be available if satellite
signals are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is discharged or discon-
nected. It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the
OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged.
OnStar is the communication link between you and existing governmen-
tal emergency and roadside service providers. OnStar will receive your
call and use reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider. OnStar
cannot promise that the providers will respond in a timely manner or at
all.
Accessory power outlet
B In the luggage compartment (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory
power outlet.
D Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such
as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory
power outlet when it is not in use.
D Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC
and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapt-
ers or more than one electrical appliance.
D If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor con-
tact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit proper-
ly.
6-20
D Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a
long period of time while the engine is not running can cause bat-
tery discharge.
HB7008EA
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at the socket
when the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by connecting it to the
socket.
NOTE
The trim cover has a notch through which the connected electri-
cal appliance’s cord can be passed.
Convenience hook
B Coat hook
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the
driver’s view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a
collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 2.2
lb (1 kg) or more.
6
Interior equipment
6-21
– CONTINUED –
HB6025BA
The coat hook is attached to each rear passenger’s hand grip.
B Shopping bag hook
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 2.2 lb (1
kg) or more.
HB7014BDHBF014CB
Sedan
n For sedan models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each inner side wall of the trunk
near the trunk lid opening.
n For station wagon models
A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion and the shopping bag hook
will appear.
6-22
Floor mat (if equipped)
CAUTION
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is placed back in its proper loca-
tion and correctly secured on its retaining pin. If the floor mat
slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals dur-
ing driving, it could cause an accident.
HB6016BAHB6015BA
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle next to the
fuel filler door release. The floor mat is secured using the built-in grom-
met, by placing the grommet over the pin and pushing downward.
Luggage cover (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the
cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or colli-
sion. This could cause serious injury.
The luggage cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to pro-
tect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make
room for additional cargo.
6
Interior equipment
6-23
– CONTINUED –
B Using the cover
HB7015BA
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then
insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from
the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the
cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.
B To remove the cover
HB7017BAHB7016BA
1. Rewind the cover.
2. To take it off the cover rails, lift it out while pressing the release
knobs located both sides of the cover housing.
3. Store the cover in the cargo area.
To install the cover:
Hang the both ends of the cover housing on the cover rails. Make
sure that the cover is mounted securely by pulling it up.
6-24
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped)
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are designed only for securing
light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity
of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lb (20 kg) per eye-
let.
HB7018BA
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks so that cargo can
be secured with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing
recesses. When not in use, put the eyelets up into the storing recesses.
Subfloor storage (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Always keep the lid of the subfloor storage closed while driv-
ing to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an
accident.
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the subfloor storage.
6
Interior equipment
6-25
– CONTINUED –
HB6007BB
Sedan
HB6008BAHB7019AD
The subfloor storage is located under the floor of the trunk or cargo area
and can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
Station wagon: Hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on
the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor storage in the trunk or car-
go area.
6-26
7
Starting and operating
Fuel 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel requirements 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler lid and cap 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to drive 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle 7-10. . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for an automatic transmission vehicle 7-10. . . . . .
Starting the engine during cold weather below –4°F (–20°C) 7-11. . .
Starting a flooded engine 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission (Brighton, L, Outback) 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever 7-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift lock release 7-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission
(with SPORTSHIFT mode – 2.5GT, 2.5GTLO) 7-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode (manual mode) 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift lock release 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) 7-30. . .
Power steering 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking tips 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) system (if equipped) 7-36. . . . . .
VDC OFF switch 7-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking your vehicle 7-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (if equipped) 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause engine damage.
J Fuel requirements
B 2.5 Liter models
The 2.5 Liter engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.
B 3.0 Liter models
The 3.0 Liter engine is designed to operate using premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher. Regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI may be used if necessary.
For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is recommended
that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline.
B Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor
Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index
(AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and
heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned
if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service techni-
cian if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle
knocks heavily or persistently.
B Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded
gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gaso-
line be used because it will damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
7
Starting and operating
7-3
– CONTINUED –
B Gasoline for California-certified LEV
Your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission vehicle (LEV)
standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label. It is designed
to optimize engine and emission control system performance with
gasoline that meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline
specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your ve-
hicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gaso-
line sold outside California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels,
which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recom-
mends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having low-
er sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
B Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels
containing alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not cov-
ered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent depos-
its from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly,
and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use
a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you
should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your
fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates.
Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated
blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation
of your SUBARU.
7-4
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated
gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU
approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service
station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates
and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as ex-
plained below.
D Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than
that specified in this manual.
D Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with un-
leaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it
does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors
required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel con-
taining methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
D If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you sus-
pect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before
seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
D Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the
use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty.
J Fuel filler lid and cap
B Refueling
WARNING
D Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga-
rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel
may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck espe-
cially in hot weather, which may cause injury.
7
Starting and operating
7-5
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
D Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of
a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
D Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
D Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle.
Fuels may cause paint damage, which is not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
D Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel
tank and emission control system might be damaged.
HBF013DAHB3000BB
Sedan
HB3007BA
HB3001BD
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid release lever up.
7-6
HB7030BB
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise.
3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically clicks off.
Do not add any more fuel.
4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking
noise. Be certain not to catch the tether under the cap while tighten-
ing.
5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.
NOTE
HG3016AA
D You will see the “FUEL DOOR p” sign in the combination
meter. This indicates that the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the
right side of the vehicle.
7
Starting and operating
7-7
– CONTINUED –
D If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether
is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light may
come on. Refer to the “Warning and indicator lights” section lo-
cated in chapter 3.
State emission testing (U.S. only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed
on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will
result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an acci-
dent or injuries to persons nearby.
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.
At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service
station in advance not to place your Subaru AWD vehicle on a two-
wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will
result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection
programs in order to meet their obligation under federal law to implement
stricter vehicle emission standards to reduce air pollution from cars. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your
car’s wheels to turn while the car remains in one place. Depending on
the severity of a state’s air pollution problems, the states must adopt
either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission inspection test. Nor-
mally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emission
inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling
vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution
problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This
test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits
7-8
more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic
emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-
wheel dynamometers in their emission testing programs have
EXEMPTED Subaru AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing pro-
gram that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing
programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD
Subaru vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the
ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission
testing.
The EPA has issued regulations for inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD) system as part of the state emissions inspection. The OBD sys-
tem is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might
cause vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. These inspections
apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and light trucks.
Several states plus the District of Columbia have opted to start the OBD
system inspection prior to the required EPA regulation effective date of
January 1, 2002. Other states will add OBD system inspection in 2002.
D The inspection of the OBD system consists of a visual operational
check of the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) and an examination of the OBD system with an electronic scan tool
while the engine is running.
D A vehicle passes
the OBD system inspection if proper the “CHECK
ENGINE” warning light/MIL illumination is observed, there is no stored
diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBD system readiness monitors are
complete.
D A vehicle fails
the OBD inspection if the “CHECK ENGINE” warning
light/MIL is not properly operating or there is one or more diagnostic
trouble codes stored in vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK ENGINE”
warning light/MIL illuminated.
D A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if
the number of OBD system readiness monitors “Not Ready” is greater
7
Starting and operating
7-9
– CONTINUED –
than three. Under this condition, the vehicle operator should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to set the monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
D Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their Subaru
Dealer for service.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day be-
fore you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unob-
structed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk and rear gate are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the en-
gine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid
levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
7-10
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten
seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for
five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying
again.
J Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral.
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter
motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator
light” section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has
started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the
idle speed as the engine warms up.
J Starting the engine for an automatic transmission ve-
hicle
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the se-
lector lever into the “N” position. Do not attempt to place the se-
lector lever of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.
7
Starting and operating
7-11
– CONTINUED –
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position (preferably “P” posi-
tion). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to the “Warning and indicator
lights” section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has
started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-
celerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the
idle speed as the engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at
the “P” or “N” position and that the parking brake is applied.
J Starting the engine during cold weather below –4°F
(–20°C)
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.
J Starting a flooded engine
If the engine does not start, it may be flooded (excessive fuel in the en-
gine).
In case of a flooded engine, turn the starter motor for five seconds with
the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Repeat this two or three times until
the engine starts. Release the ignition switch and accelerator pedal as
soon as the engine starts.
7-12
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will
cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster,
making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in
accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the ignition
switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.
Manual transmission
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely
stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting
into reverse when the vehicle is moving.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed 5-forward and 1-re-
verse speed transmission.
7
Starting and operating
7-13
– CONTINUED –
OM-H2241
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th
gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to the neutral position then
shift into reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever,
and gradually let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again.
B Shifting speeds
n Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle perfor-
mance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds
listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
7-14
n Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear position except for
brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometer’s needle (if so
equipped) will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and
poor fuel economy.
mph (km/h)
Vehicle type
Gear
Brighton L GT
OUT-
BACK
1st 30 (48) 30 (49) 29 (47) 31 (50)
2nd 50 (81) 51 (82) 49 (79) 52 (84)
3rd 71 (115) 73 (117) 70 (112) 74 (119)
B Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of
those actions may cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause
wear on the transmission components.
7
Starting and operating
7-15
– CONTINUED –
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turn-
ing corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before
the engine starts to labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd
gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend
brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you
“ride” (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may over-
heat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly
accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon
does not indicate a fault.
Automatic transmission (Brighton, L, Outback)
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into the “D”, “3”, “2”,
“1” or “R” position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This
may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
D Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
D Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any posi-
tion except the “N” or “P” position when the brake is set or the
tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmission
fluid to overheat.
D Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into
the “R” position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled with 4-forward
7-16
speeds and 1-reverse speed.
NOTE
Immediately after a disconnected battery is reconnected or ATF (au-
tomatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the auto-
matic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from erasure or invalidation of data the on-board com-
puter has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission
to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of
your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle con-
tinues to be driven for a while.
J Selector lever
HB7021BBHB7010AA
The selector lever has seven positions.
B P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the
vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift
into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission
system to ensure safe starting of the vehicle.
7
Starting and operating
7-17
– CONTINUED –
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other position, you
have to depress the brake pedal fully when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is
started.
If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed, refer to the “Shift lock release” section in this chap-
ter.
B R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle completely
then move the lever to the “R” position.
B N (Neutral)
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the
risk of an accident is consequently increased.
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this
position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on
the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, the engine braking does not act.
B D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
7-18
n While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from
taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the
chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat-
ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting result-
ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on
the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle
again.
n While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause
the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine brak-
ing. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade
does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can
happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is
very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has
been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF tem-
perature has risen to a certain level, automatic downshift normal-
ly takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for engine
braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at
speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
B 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
7
Starting and operating
7-19
– CONTINUED –
will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
B 2 (Second)
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road
surfaces such as mud or snow. It will ensure greater traction.
B 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving
through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the
transmission holds in the 1st gear.
B Maximum speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear. The tachometer’s (if so equipped) needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded.
When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current
vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of
the gear which is about to be selected.
Exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speeds will result in over-revving
of the engine. In addition a powerful engine brake will engage and
control of the vehicle may be lost.
7-20
mph (km/h)
Vehicle
type
Brighton L
OUTBACK
Position
t
ype
Brighton
,
L
2.5 liter 3.0 liter
1 35 (56) 31 (50) 35 (57)
2 64 (103) 62 (100) 69 (111)
3 100 (161) 102 (164) 111 (178)
NOTE
In order to prevent over-revving during deceleration of the
vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if the
speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.
B Driving tips
D Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
D Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not
hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
D Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade
by using the “D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position. Use the brake instead.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly
accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon
does not indicate a fault.
J Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the “ON” position, perform
the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the regular screwdriver.
7
Starting and operating
7-21
– CONTINUED –
HB7020BAHB7010CA
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and move the selector lever from the
“P” to the “N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and
start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
system repaired.
Automatic transmission (with SPORTSHIFT mode
– 2.5GT, 2.5GTLO)
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into the “D”, “3”, “2”,
“1” or “R” position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This
may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
D Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
D Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any posi-
tion except the “N” or “P” position when the brake is set or when
7-22
wheel blocks are used. This may cause the automatic transmis-
sion fluid to overheat.
D Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into
the “R” position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled with 4-forward
speeds and 1-reverse speed. Also, it has a SPORTSHIFT mode.
NOTE
Immediately after a disconnected battery is reconnected or ATF (au-
tomatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the auto-
matic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from erasure or invalidation of data which the on-board
computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmis-
sion to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition
of your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
J Selector lever
HB7025BAHB7026BB
When the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the button
in.
Shift while pressing the button in.
Shift without pressing the button.
7
Starting and operating
7-23
– CONTINUED –
The selector lever has seven positions, “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “3”, “2” and
“1”, and also has a manual gate for using “SPORTSHIFT” mode.
The release button must be pushed to select the “P”, “R”, or “2” posi-
tions.
B P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the
vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift
into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission
system to ensure safe starting of the vehicle.
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to any other position, you have
to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on the
selector lever when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed, the release button pushed in, and the ignition
switch in the ON position, refer to the “Shift lock release” section in
chapter 3.
B R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle completely
then move the lever to the “R” position while pushing the release but-
ton.
B N (Neutral)
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the
risk of an accident is consequently increased.
7-24
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this
position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on
the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine braking effect.
B D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
To use the SPORTSHIFT mode, move the lever from this position into
the manual gate.
n While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from
taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the
chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat-
ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting result-
ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on
the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle
again.
n While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause
the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine brake-
ing. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade
7
Starting and operating
7-25
– CONTINUED –
does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can
happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is
very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has
been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF tem-
perature has risen to a certain level, automatic downshift normal-
ly takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for engine
braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at
speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
B 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
B 2 (Second)
To shift from the “3” to “2” position, push the release button.
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off from a standstill on slippery road
surfaces such as mud or snow. It will ensure greater traction.
B 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving
through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the
transmission holds in the 1st gear.
J Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode (manual mode)
1. Select the SPORTSHIFT mode by moving the selector lever into the
manual gate from the “D” position with the vehicle stationary or moving.
7-26
HB7027BB
2. Once the SPORTSHIFT mode is selected, the currently selected gear
is shown by the shift position indicator in the meter cluster. Next to this
indication, arrow-shaped lamps show whether an upshift is possible and
whether a downshift is possible.
HBS094BB
Lamps showing whether upshifting and downshifting are possible:
The c and d lamps show whether upshifting and downshifting are pos-
sible. When both lamps are off, SPORTSHIFT operation is not possible.
When both lamps are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible.
When only the c lamp is on, only upshifting is possible. When only the
d lamp is on, only downshifting is possible.
3. Perform gearshifts using the selector lever. You can shift by one gear
at a time in the 1st-to-4th-gear range.
7
Starting and operating
7-27
– CONTINUED –
Upshifting
Shift to the next-higher gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear range) by pushing the
selector lever toward the “+” end of the manual gate.
Downshifting
Shift to the next-lower gear (in the 1st-to-4th-gear range) by pushing the
selector lever toward the “–” end of the manual gate.
4. To deselect the SPORTSHIFT mode, return the selector lever to the
“D” position from the manual gate.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind
when using the SPORTSHIFT mode.
D When the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid is
lower or higher than normal, warning beeps are emitted and the shift
position indicator shows “–”. If these warnings are issued, deselect
the SPORTSHIFT mode to protect the automatic transmission from
damage.
D Automatic gearshifts do not take place in the Sports Shift mode.
Perform gearshifts in accordance with road conditions so that the
tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. If the engine speed
reaches a predetermined level, a fuel-cut function will operate. Shift
up if this happens.
D If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high,
i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond
the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the downshift is
not possible.
D If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the
transmission will not respond.
D You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd or from
2nd to 4th) by operating the selector lever twice in rapid succession.
D The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle
stops moving. It will not permit a standing start in 2nd gear.
7-28
B Maximum speeds
WARNING
When down shifting a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine braking caused by
downshifting when the vehicle is travelling on a slippery surface
can lead to wheel locking; as a consequence, control of the
vehicle may be lost and the risk of an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear. The tachometer’s (if so equipped) needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded.
When down shifting, it is important to confirm that the current vehicle
speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of the gear
which is about to be selected.
Exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speeds will result in over-revving
of the engine. In addition a powerful engine brake will engage and
control of the vehicle may be lost.
mph (km/h)
Vehicle type
Position
2.5GT
1 29 (47)
2 58 (93)
3 96 (154)
Never exceed posted speed limits.
NOTE
D In order to prevent over-revving during acceleration of the
vehicle, the transmission will automatically shift to the next high-
er gear if the Maximum Allowable Speed for the current gear is
7
Starting and operating
7-29
– CONTINUED –
reached.
D Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving during deceleration
of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if
the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.
B Driving tips
D Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped in the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1”, or “R” position.
D Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not
hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
D Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade
by using the “D”, “3”, “2” or “1” position. Use the brake instead.
D The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly
accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon
does not indicate a fault.
J Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake
pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the “ON” position, perform
the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.
3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with the regular screwdriver.
HB7030BAHB7029BA
7-30
4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
5. Push down on the screwdriver, push down the button and move the
selector lever from the “P” to the “N” position.
6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and
start the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
system repaired.
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD)
(if equipped)
CAUTION
D Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as
the vehicle may move.
D If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid continued spinning at
high speed as this could adversely affect the LSD.
D If a different size rear tire is temporarily used (as in an emer-
gency), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a
regular size tire as soon as possible.
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power according to the differ-
ence in revolutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be
caused by certain driving conditions, thereby improving driving stability
on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
7
Starting and operating
7-31
– CONTINUED –
Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or
right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power
steering pump.
The power steering system operates only when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system
fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started and before it has warmed up,
you may hear a noise coming from areas adjacent to the power
steering pump which is located at the right-front area of the engine
compartment. This noise is normal. It does not indicate power steer-
ing system trouble.
Braking
J Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can
cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear
on the brake pads and linings.
B When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get
wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the
brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
B Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking.
7-32
When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes
may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a
lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
B Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured.
This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road
to a safe place.
J Brake system
B Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit
works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system
should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer to the floor than usual and
you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer dis-
tance will be needed to stop the vehicle.
B Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking
force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off
the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster com-
pletely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to
push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance
will increase.
7
Starting and operating
7-33
– CONTINUED –
J Disc brake pad wear warning indicators
OM-H0163
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a
warning noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while
braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU deal-
er.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to
a serious accident.
CAUTION
D The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance.
You should always maintain a safe following distance from other
vehicles.
D When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy road,
or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driv-
ing under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and
7-34
leave ample distance from other vehicles.
D When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during
sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent
the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or
feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS
operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
B ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating
sound of ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is
started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-
tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condition.
B ABS warning light
HB4010GA
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.
7
Starting and operating
7-35
– CONTINUED –
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system continues to operate normal-
ly.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described below, the ABS sys-
tem may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started
but goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been
started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8
mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due
to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
7-36
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) system
(if equipped)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving — overconfidence because
you are driving with a VDC system equipped vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
D Even if your vehicle is equipped with VDC, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a
VDC system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to
avoid accidents in any situation.
D Activation of the VDC system is an indication that the road
being travelled on has a slippery surface; since having VDC is no
guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times
and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign
that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
D Whenever suspension components, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with VDC, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer perform an inspection of that system.
D The following precautions should be observed in order to
ensure that the VDC system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size,
type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be
the same for all four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s door pillar.
– Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat
tire. With a temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the VDC
system is reduced and this should be taken into account when
driving with vehicle.
7
Starting and operating
7-37
– CONTINUED –
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface
and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the VDC system
adjusts the engine’s output and the wheels’ respective braking forces to
help maintain traction and directional control.
D Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the
driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain
traction and directional control. Activation of this function is shown by
steady illumination of the VDC operation indicator light.
D Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional
stability by suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide sideways dur-
ing steering operations. Activation of this function is shown by flash-
ing of the VDC operation indicator light.
NOTE
D Slight twitching of the brake pedal may be felt when the VDC-sys-
tem operates; a small degree of vehicle or steering wheel shaking
may also be noticed in this situation. These are normal characteris-
tics of VDC operation and are no cause for alarm.
D When driving off immediately after starting the engine, a short-
lived operation noise may be noticed coming from the engine
compartment. This noise is generated as a result of a check being
performed on the VDC system and is normal.
D Depending on the timing of activation of the brakes, certain situa-
tions may occur just after driving off where the brake pedal seems
to exhibit a jolting motion. This too is a consequence of the VDC
operational check and is normal.
D In the circumstances listed below, the vehicle may be more un-
stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control Sys-
tem may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a sys-
tem fault.
D on gravel-covered or rutted roads
D on unfinished roads
D when the vehicle is towing a trailer
7-38
D when the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires
D Activation of the VDC system will cause operation of the steering
wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal condi-
tions.
D Even if the vehicle is equipped with a VDC system, it is important
that winter tires be used when driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size
and brand).
D It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a cor-
ner, even if the vehicle is equipped with VDC.
D All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type,
and brand; furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for
all four tires. If these precautions are not observed and non-match-
ing tires are used, it is quite possible that the VDC system will be
unable to operate correctly as intended.
D Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire as failure to do
so may render the VDC system unable to operate correctly.
B VDC system monitor
HB4010FB
n VDC OFF indicator light
D The VDC OFF indicator light turns on initially when the ignition key
is turned to the ON position; it subsequently turns off 6 seconds after
the engine is started.
D This light turns on to indicate that the VDC system is in non-opera-
tion mode. This does not constitute failure of the VDC system.
7
Starting and operating
7-39
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
D The VDC OFF indicator light may stay on for a while after the
engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This occurs
because the engine has not yet warmed up and is completely nor-
mal. The light will turn off when the engine has reached a suitable
operating temperature.
D When an engine problem occurs and the CHECK ENGINE
warning light turns on, the VDC OFF indicator light will also turn
on.
The following two situations could indicate malfunction of the VDC
system; if either should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer
carry out an inspection of that system at the first available opportunity.
D The VDC OFF indicator light does not turn on when the ignition key
is turned to the ON position.
D The VDC OFF indicator light fails to turn off after the engine is
started, even when several minutes have passed to allow the engine
to heat up sufficiently.
n VDC operation indicator light
The VDC operation indicator light turns on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position; it turns off approximately two seconds later.
This indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression
function and is illuminated steadily during activation of the traction
control function.
The following two situations could indicate a malfunction of the VDC
system; if either should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer
carry out an inspection of that system at the first available opportunity.
D The VDC operation indicator light does not turn on when the igni-
tion key is turned to the ON position.
D The VDC operation indicator light does not turn off approximately
two seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the ON position.
n VDC warning light
The VDC warning light turns on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and off when the engine is started. This lighting pattern
indicates that the VDC system is operating normally.
7-40
The following situations could indicate a malfunction of the VDC sys-
tem; if any should occur, have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
out an inspection of the system at the first available opportunity.
D The VDC warning light does not turn on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position.
D The VDC warning light does not turn off either when the engine is
started or when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 8 mph
(12 km/h).
D The VDC warning light turns on while the vehicle is being driven.
D When a malfunction has occurred in the VDC electrical system,
only the VDC warning light will turn on. In such an event, the ABS will
still be operating normally.
D The VDC warning light will also turn on when a problem occurs
with the ABS or VDC electronic control systems.
Because the VDC system controls each brake through the ABS,
whenever the ABS stops operating due to a malfunction in that electri-
cal system, the VDC will also become unable to control all four
brakes. Thus VDC system operation halts and the VDC warning light
turns on. Although both the VDC system and the ABS will be inoper-
able in this situation, it will still be possible to stop the vehicle using
normal braking. The VDC system and the ABS do not adversely affect
operation of the vehicle in any way when they are inoperable; how-
ever should such a situation occur, drive with care and have an autho-
rized SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of those systems at the
first available opportunity.
NOTE
When the VDC warning light turns on and off in the following way,
it indicates that the VDC system is operating normally.
D Although turning on after the engine has been started, the
warning light quickly turns off and stays off.
D The warning light turns on after the engine is started and does
not turn off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light turns on when the vehicle is being driven; it
then turns off and stays off.
7
Starting and operating
7-41
– CONTINUED –
J VDC OFF switch
HB7028ABHB7022AA
Note: Even when the lighting switch is turned to the “p” or “a” posi-
tion, the “OFF” portion of the symbol stamped on the switch will not illu-
minate in the dark. Only “VDC” portion will illuminate.
Pressing the VDC OFF switch to deactivate the VDC system can facilitate
the following operations:
D a standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-cov-
ered, or otherwise slippery surface
D extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep
snow
When the VDC OFF switch is pressed during engine operation, the VDC
OFF indicator light illuminates.
The VDC system will be deactivated and the vehicle will behave like a
model not equipped with the VDC system.
When the VDC OFF switch is pressed again to reactivate the VDC sys-
tem, the VDC OFF indicator light goes off.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) after
the VDC OFF switch is pressed to deactivate the VDC system, the VDC
system automatically reactivates itself and the VDC OFF indicator light
goes off. While the vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately 37
mph (60 km/h) or higher, it is not possible to deactivate the VDC system
by pressing the VDC OFF switch.
With the VDC system deactivated, traction and stability enhancement of-
fered by VDC system is unavailable. Therefore you should not deactivate
7-42
the VDC system except under above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
D When the VDC switch has been pressed to deactivate the VDC
system, the VDC system automatically reactivates itself the next
time the ignition key is turned to the OFF position and the engine is
restarted.
D If the VDC OFF switch is held down for 10 seconds or longer, the
VDC OFF indicator light goes off, the VDC system is activated, and
the system ignores any further pressing of the VDC OFF switch. To
make the VDC OFF switch usable again, turn the ignition key to the
OFF position and restart the engine.
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
D Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They
could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadver-
tent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tem-
perature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough
to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
D Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
D Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause
unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive,
always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.
7
Starting and operating
7-43
– CONTINUED –
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down
while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.
HB4001BA
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release
button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking
brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the
warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the
“Warning and indicator lights” section (chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put
the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a down-
grade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for
automatic transmission vehicles. Always set the parking brake firmly
when parking your vehicle. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold
the vehicle.
7-44
HB4015AAHB4014AA
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle
is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the
curb. When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the
curb.
Cruise control (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following condi-
tions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:
D driving up or down a steep grade
D driving on slippery or winding roads
D driving in heavy traffic
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without
holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the
vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is
turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally
by setting the cruise control.
7
Starting and operating
7-45
– CONTINUED –
B To set cruise control
HG0312HB3002BB
Cruise control lever
1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch. The indicator light on the switch
will come on.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches the de-
sired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction
and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the
cruise control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
celerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the ve-
hicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
B To temporarily cancel the cruise control
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily:
D Depress the brake pedal.
D Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction. (if so equipped)
D Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission vehicles only).
D Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (automatic transmis-
sion vehicles only).
To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled
and with vehicle speed of about 20 mph (32 km/h) or more, push the
control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction to return to
the original cruising speed automatically.
7-46
B To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Push the main switch again.
D Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
B To change the cruising speed
n To increase the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction and
hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the
control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized
and treated as the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set
speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be increased
1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever upward in
the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction quickly within a half second.
n To increase the speed (by accelerator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the de-
sired speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction
once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running
at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual vehicle speed when the con-
trol lever is pushed downward and the speed last time you set is
less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1
mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the cruise control system
unit regards this lever operation as that intended to decrease the
vehicle speed.
n To decrease the speed (by control lever)
Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction and
hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the
control lever. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized
and treated as the new set speed.
7
Starting and operating
7-47
– CONTINUED –
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set
speed is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can be lowered 1
mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the control lever downward in
the “SET, COAST” direction quickly within a half second.
n To decrease the speed (by brake pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed, press the control
lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction once. Now the desired
speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
7-48
8
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 8-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy hints 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic inspections 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in foreign countries 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips for AWD vehicles 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off road driving 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving 8-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow tires 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire chains 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking the vehicle 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading your vehicle 8-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle capacity weight 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle
Weight Rating) 8-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) 8-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer hitch (if equipped) 8-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing 8-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions
during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
D Do not race the engine.
B Break-in engine speed limit
D Vehicle with tachometer
Never exceed 4,000 rpm engine speed except for brief acceleration
in an emergency.
D Vehicle without tachometer (for manual transmission)
Do not exceed the speed limits below for each gear position except
for brief acceleration in an emergency.
mph (km/h)
1st
2nd 3rd 4th
22 (35) 37 (60) 50 (80) 65 (105)
D Vehicles without tachometer (for automatic transmission)
Try to drive at moderate speeds while accelerating and braking
smoothly. Proper gears are selected automatically according to the
driving conditions.
D Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,
either fast or slow.
D Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emer-
gency.
D Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or
overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced
with new ones.
8
Driving tips
8-3
– CONTINUED –
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
D Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
D Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently
until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as
long as possible.
D Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
D Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
D Keep the engine properly tuned.
D Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire plac-
ard, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side. Low pres-
sure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
D Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
D Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
D Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
8-4
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the
manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound
coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine
has been shut off. This sound is normal.
Catalytic converter
WARNING
D Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), be-
cause the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
D Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the ex-
haust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very
hot.
HB8029BA
HB3003BA
8
Driving tips
8-5
– CONTINUED –
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as
catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing
cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
D Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline
will damage the catalytic converter.
D Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
D Avoid racing the engine.
D Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.
D Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (mis-
firing, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
D Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat
shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the
recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet” performed at the specified
time or mileage intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
D Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to the “Fuel require-
ment” section in chapter 7.)
D Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
8-6
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
OM-H0154
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD
vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also pro-
vide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking
force during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an
ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to
AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD sys-
tem, you should keep the following tips in mind:
D An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or
slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little differ-
ence in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden brak-
8
Driving tips
8-7
– CONTINUED –
ing. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, circum-
ference, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on
the tire placard. Using other sizes, circumferences or construction may re-
sult in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and
may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
D If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use
the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes
may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
D Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The rec-
ommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located
under the door latch on the driver’s side.
D Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.
D There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your
vehicle. For detail information, see “Towing” section in chapter 9.
Off road driving
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence
because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
B All AWD models except OUTBACK
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all
terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road
use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in sit-
uations in which driving surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free
8-8
and otherwise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under
other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under war-
ranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next section (applicable to the
OUTBACK) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your
vehicle’s off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the OUT-
BACK.
Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded
with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or
water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and
may cause it to stall.
B OUTBACK
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, your
Subaru can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep
in mind that an AWD Subaru is a passenger car and is neither a con-
ventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your
Subaru off-road, certain common sense precautions such as the fol-
lowing should be taken:
D Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seat
belts.
D Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or
chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and portable phone or citi-
zens band radio.
D Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in danger-
ous areas or over rough terrain.
D Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-
road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked
curves, traffic signs and the like.
D Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up
or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over
sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep.
D Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
D Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad
8
Driving tips
8-9
– CONTINUED –
bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with
your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
D If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed
for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow
enough that it does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage. Water en-
tering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regardless of its
depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in
possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
D Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driv-
ing in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on
the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
D Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry
grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is
very hot while the engine is running and right after engine stops. This
could create a fire hazard.
D After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering
to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or ad-
hering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
D Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it
is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts,
unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the ve-
hicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress
the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and
forth between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free
the vehicle.
D When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better
8-10
traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st
(both for MT and AT).
D Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in
this manual.
D Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions
such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent re-
placement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that spe-
cified in the maintenance schedule described in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your Subaru while operating it off-
road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed
above is not eligible for warranty coverage.
Winter driving
HB3010AA
B Operation during cold weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window
scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery ca-
pacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough pow-
er for cold winter starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather.
Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting.
8
Driving tips
8-11
– CONTINUED –
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or
glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber
weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to
melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do
not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may dam-
age the paint of the vehicle.
n Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes
because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelera-
tor pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to
avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop
when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders peri-
odically.
n Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle.
Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold
weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, observe the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual transmission vehicles,
and in “P” for automatic transmission vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper
blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
8-12
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily cov-
ered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing
may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking
action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage
the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
n Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk
of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recom-
mended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose.
When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is
refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is
best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.
B Driving on snowy and icy roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or
icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt ac-
celeration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on
snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to con-
trol the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to
lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking per-
formance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to the “ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System)” and “VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) system” section in
chapter 7 for information on braking on slippery surfaces.
8
Driving tips
8-13
– CONTINUED –
n Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen
to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow
control button/dial in the “
” position and the temperature control
dial set for maximum warmth until the wiper blades are completely
thawed out. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful
to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade,
use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of
the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the air-
flow control button/dial in “
” and the temperature control dial set
for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to
melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effec-
tively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe
place, then remove it. If you stop the car at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades)
during the seasons you could have snow and sub-zero temperatures.
Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy condi-
tions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.
B Corrosion protection
Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section (chapter 10).
8-14
J Snow tires
B All models except Outback
WARNING
D When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make
sure you use only the same size, construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, cir-
cumferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other
sizes, circumferences or constructions may result in severe me-
chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which are designed to
provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking per-
formance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to en-
hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for win-
ter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the
correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dan-
gerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure
that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires
on your vehicle.
8
Driving tips
8-15
– CONTINUED –
B Outback models only
WARNING
D When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make
sure you use only the same size and construction as recom-
mended. Using other sizes or construction may affect speedome-
ter/odometer calibration and clearance between the body and
tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol.
D You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, cir-
cumferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other
sizes, circumferences or constructions may result in severe me-
chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which are designed to
provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking per-
formance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to en-
hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for win-
ter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the
correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dan-
gerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure
that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires
on your vehicle.
Your Outback comes with P225/60R16 “all season tires” as origi-
nal equipment. You should be aware that some winter tires with
that same size designation may actually be too large for the
8-16
vehicle and may cause rubbing on sharp turns. Listed below is
the winter tire size that we recommend.
Recommended winter (snow) tire size
P215/60R16 Studless
J Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on tires listed below because of lack
of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.
D P205/55R16 tires for GT models
D P225/60R16 tires for OUTBACK models
D P215/60R16 winter (snow) tires for OUTBACK models
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains,
in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE
class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary
spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit
chains on the front tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains – overconfi-
dence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a se-
rious accident.
J Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the
accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth be-
tween “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible
traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for
MT and AT).
8
Driving tips
8-17
– CONTINUED –
Refer to the “Automatic transmission” section in chapter 7 for information
on holding the transmission in 2nd position.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback, in
the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious in-
jury.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as possible.
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it when-
ever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the
vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
D Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting
forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
D Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
D Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seat-
back (for sedan) or the extended luggage cover (for station wag-
on). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden
stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.
8-18
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.
J Vehicle capacity weight
HB0382HB8015BA
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is
shown as the Vehicle Capacity Weight on the tire information label at-
tached to the driver’s side door jamb. It includes the total weight of driver
and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a
trailer.
8
Driving tips
8-19
– CONTINUED –
J GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
HBF019BB
The certification label attached to the driver’s side door shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is
the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers,
luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb
Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capac-
ity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never ex-
ceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
luggage inside the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity
weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on
the distribution of the luggage.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and
front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your
vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals
because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
8-20
J Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped)
CAUTION
D For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rail must be used to-
gether with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying at-
tachment. The roof rail must never be used alone to carry cargo.
Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road haz-
ard due to loss of cargo could result.
D When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total
weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not
exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
HB8016BB
The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo by itself. Cargo can be car-
ried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and installing the
appropriate carrying attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Roof slats are not designed to carry or hold cargo, but are designed as
the protector to prevent the roof from being damaged by cargo while it is
being loaded and unloaded on the roof crossbar or on any carrying
attachment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carry-
ing attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained below.
You should also be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross
8
Driving tips
8-21
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). See the “Loading your vehicle” section in this chapter for
information on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment must not ex-
ceed 100 lb. (45 kg). Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the
roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.
B Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski
carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the crossbars, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and make sure that the attachment is se-
curely fixed to the crossbars. Use only attachments designed specifi-
cally for the crossbars. A set of the crossbars is designed to carry
loads (cargo and attachment) of not more than 100 lb. (45 kg). Before
operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured
on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the
weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving charac-
teristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt
stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.
B Removal and installation of the crossbars
CAUTION
Do not carry cargo on the roof when the crossbars are removed.
Luggage on the roof will be thrown forward or backward in sud-
den stops or rapid accelerations, resulting in a dangerous road
hazard.
The crossbars can be removed when you do not use the roof to carry
cargo.
8-22
n To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen and remove the T–30 torxR head screw from the top of
each crossbar end support.
2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom of each end support down-
ward approximately 90°.
3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof rails.
n To install the crossbar
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has 100 LBS. Load Label on left-hand side.
HB1011BC
1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof rails, make sure that the
T-30 torxR head screw is removed from the top of each crossbar end
support.
2. Rotate the lower clamp on the bottom of each end support down-
ward approximately 90°.
3. With the front direction arrow label on the top right side of the
crossbar pointing toward the front of the vehicle, carefully place the
crossbar across the top of the vehicle so that the crossbar end sup-
ports rest on the top of the roof rails approximately 6 inches (152 mm)
rearward from the seam (joint) between the front roof rail support and
the roof rail.
4. Rotate (raise) the lower clamp up to the bottom of the roof rail and
loosely tighten the T-30 torxR head screw with the torxR wrench pro-
vided, through the top of the end support and into the threaded insert
in the lower clamp on each end of the crossbar.
8
Driving tips
8-23
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
It may be necessary to squeeze the lower clamp and the end sup-
port together to compress the pads and gain a better alignment
of the pieces while trying to start the screw. Use care not to
crossthread the screw in the insert.
5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on the roof rails, and if avail-
able, use a T-30 torxR bit and torque wrench and tighten the T-30
torxR head screws to 30 to 35 inch lbs. (3.4 to 4.0 N-m, 0.35 to 0.41
kg-m) of torque (or tighten securely with the torxR wrench provided).
Rear crossbar:
HB1012BC
Install the rear crossbar in the same manner as the front crossbar.
NOTE
The rear crossbar should be positioned 6 inches (152 mm) for-
ward of the rear seam (joint) between the rear roof rail support
and the roof rail.
NOTE
Before each use of the roof crossbar, make sure the four T-30 cross-
bar clamp screws have been checked, and retightened if necessary
to 35 inch lbs. (4.0 N-m, 0.41 kg-m), as outlined in Step #5 above.
8-24
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
WARNING
D Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situation. Refer to the next section
“Trailer towing” for possible recommendations and limitations.
D Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds
1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that
each chain will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. Towing
trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard
if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
D Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
D Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch
only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of
weight distributing hitch.
The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class 1 rated load. A maximum of
2,400 lbs. (1,087 kg) gross trailer weight and a maximum of 200 lbs. (90
kg) gross tongue weight are permissible for the trailer hitch.
When you tow a trailer, follow the instructions in the next section “Trailer
towing”.
8
Driving tips
8-25
– CONTINUED –
B Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then in-
sert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the hitch receiver tube so that
the pin passes through the ball mount.
HB8018BA
3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin securely.
HB8019BA
8-26
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does not come off the hitch re-
ceiver.
HB8020AA
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your
trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold
the trailer’s maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under
the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow suffi-
cient slack in the chains taking tight–turn situations into account; how-
ever, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
HB8022BBHB8020BB
8
Driving tips
8-27
– CONTINUED –
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black four–pin wire connector to
the towing trailer’s wire harness
HB8021BB
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually
activating the brake, right turn signal, left turn signal, stop, and park-
ing lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or
retrieving a watercraft.
B When you do not tow a trailer
D Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the
receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube.
D Place the dust cap over the four–pin connector of the hitch wire
harness to protect against possible damage.
D Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four–pin connector using
the terminal grease.
8-28
Trailer towing
Your car is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your car’s en-
gine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect
on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend
upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your ve-
hicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchas-
ing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installa-
tion and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment
manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that
result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in
the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to fol-
low the proper instructions.
B Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more
frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions” in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle
or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmis-
sion, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving.
B Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained below. Exceed-
ing the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
8
Driving tips
8-29
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and
its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
D Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW,
GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in
your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
n Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never
exceed the maximum weight shown below.
OUTBACK Wagon
Model Conditions Maximum total
trailer weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,400 lbs (1,087 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8 km)
with an outside temperature of 104°F
(40°C) or above.
1,200 lbs (543 kg)
Others
Model Conditions Maximum total
trailer weight
MT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)
AT models When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill
grade continuously for over 5 miles (8 km)
with an outside temperature of 104°F
(40°C) or above.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
8-30
OM-H2781
Total trailer weight
n Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the
vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore,
the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW
each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on
a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s door
of your vehicle.
HBF019BB
Gross Vehicle Weight
OM-H2782
8
Driving tips
8-31
– CONTINUED –
B Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle.
The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the certification label.
HBF019BB
Gross Axle Weight
OM-H2784
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight
and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have
your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight
distribution while driving.
n Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer’s
axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially
during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during corner-
ing, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8 to 11 percent of the total
trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of 200 lbs (90
kg).
The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in
8-32
the illustration below. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to posi-
tion the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
OM-H2786
Tongue load
OM-H2785
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in
the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in
the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the
front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the
load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight
distribution while driving.
OM-H2787
8
Driving tips
8-33
– CONTINUED –
B Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a
commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water
or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled
hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also,
drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause dete-
rioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
D Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
D Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to
the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
B OUTBACK wagon
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is recommended. A genu-
ine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoidable, be sure the hitch is
suited to your vehicle and trailer. Consult with a professional hitch
supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is
not designed to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts
and nuts are tight.
8-34
B All vehicles except OUTBACK wagon
SUBARU does not offer accessory trailer hitches. Consult with a pro-
fessional hitch supplier to assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch
for your vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the rear bumper. The bumper is
not designed to handle that type of load.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tight.
B Connecting a trailer
n Trailer brakes
WARNING
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and
its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
D Do not directly connect your trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight)
exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with
its own brake system. Electric brakes or surge brakes are recom-
mended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailer’s
brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable
regulations. Your SUBARU’s brake system is not designed to be
tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system. Please ask your
SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information
about the trailer’s brake system.
n Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer.
Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety
hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling dam-
age or hitch ball damage.
8
Driving tips
8-35
– CONTINUED –
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or
become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer
safety chains. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case
the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow suffi-
cient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into account; how-
ever, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety chain connection, refer to the
instructions for your hitch and trailer.
n Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side
mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind
spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side
mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province
and/or other applicable regulations.
HB0085
n Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction
of your vehicle’s lighting system.
8-36
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires
modifications to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its capacity
and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for
proper operation of the turn signals, the brake lights and parking
lights each time you hitch up.
n Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated.
OUTBACK: The recommended cold tire pressure under trailer
towing conditions is indicated on the tire placard located under the
door striker on the driver’s side. Adjust the rear tire pressure to the
recommended pressure shown on the tire placard when the tires
are cold. Normal pressure should be maintained in the front tires.
Other models: It is recommended to inflate the rear tires to 3 psi
(20 kPa, 0.2 kg/cm
2
) above their normal operating pressure when
the tires are cold. Normal pressure should be maintained in the
front tires.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a
commercial road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a pre-
caution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly
secured.
8
Driving tips
8-37
– CONTINUED –
B Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
D Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
D When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be different from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never speed. You should also keep the fol-
lowing tips in mind:
n Before starting out on a trip
D Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good
condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.
D Check that the vehicle sits horizontally with the trailer attached. If
the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear,
check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again,
then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
D Check that the tire pressures are correct.
D Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm
that.
– the trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer’s
brake lights illuminate when the vehicle’s brake pedal is pressed,
and that the trailer’s turn signal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn
signal lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured safety in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a
significant blind spot.
D Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/
trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traf-
fic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.
8-38
n Driving with a trailer
D You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when
towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skid-
ding or jackknifing and loss of control.
D Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, always start out in first gear and release the
clutch at moderate engine revolution.
D Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
D Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning
radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle
wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
D Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and
trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or
the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the
steering wheel and slow down immediately but gradually.
D When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required
because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the
trailer to your vehicle.
D Backing up with a trailer is difficult and takes practice. When back-
ing up with a trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. When turning
back, grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand and turn it
to the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right for a right turn.
Left turn
Right turn
OM-H2791
D If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion,
stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by the
8
Driving tips
8-39
– CONTINUED –
nearest SUBARU dealer.
n Driving on grades
D Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into lower gear
(if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect
and prevent overheating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sud-
den downshifts.
D When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off
automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
D When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the water tem-
perature gauge pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP warning
light (for AT vehicles) since the engine and transmission are relatively
prone to overheating under these conditions. If the water temperature
gauge pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP
warning light illuminates, immediately switch off the air conditioner
and stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place. Refer to the “Engine
overheat” section in chapter 9, and “Warning and indicator lights”
section in chapter 3.
D If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the
accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using
the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid
to overheat. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic trans-
mission, avoid driving with the gear selector lever in “D” when towing
a heavy trailer to prevent fluid overheating. A lower gear should be
used.
n Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking.
Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope.
But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly
8-40
release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or “P” (auto-
matic transmission) and shut off the engine.
9
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an emergency 9-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary spare tire 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat tires 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump starting 9-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine overheating 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof — if the moonroof cannot be closed 9-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance tools 9-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jack and jack handle 9-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
If you park your vehicle in an emergency
HB8002BA
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other
drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a prob-
lem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition
switch position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher
switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
9
In case of emergency
9-3
– CONTINUED –
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead
to an accident.
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using
other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire
and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare
tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon as possible because the
spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to
keep the tire ready for use. The correct pressure is 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2
kg/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note the following:
D Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
D Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the
smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.
D Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
D Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so
road clearance is reduced.
D When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
9-4
HB8003BBHG0106
Indicator
location
mark
Tread wear
indicator bar
NOTE
[Automatic transmission vehicle not equipped with VDC (Vehicle Dy-
namics Control) and not equipped with SPORTSHIFT] Before driving
your vehicle with the temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside
the FWD connector located in the engine compartment and confirm
that the Front-wheel drive warning light comes on. The all wheel
drive capability of the vehicle has now been deactivated. After re-
installing the conventional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD
connector in order to reactivate all wheel drive.
Flat tires
WARNING
D Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road sur-
face. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a severe accident.
D Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack sup-
plied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never
get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
D Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the
ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle sup-
ported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point
due to a jolt and this can result in a severe accident.
9
In case of emergency
9-5
– CONTINUED –
D Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the
spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose
and lead to an accident.
D Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger
compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or colli-
sions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury.
Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the en-
gine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission ve-
hicle in reverse or an automatic transmission vehicle in the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite
the flat tire.
HGS038BA
9-6
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench.
HB6008BCHB9003BB
HS0252
Temporary spare tire
HBF015CB
Jack handle
Jack
Spare tire
HB8004BD
The spare tire is stored under the floor of the trunk or cargo area.
To remove the spare tire, proceed as follows:
Sedan: Remove the floor cover from the trunk. Remove the storage tray.
Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
Station wagon: Open the lid and hang the hook provided on the under-
9
In case of emergency
9-7
– CONTINUED –
side of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.
Remove the storage tray. Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then
take spare tire out.
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, care-
fully read the section “Temporary spare tire” in this chapter and strictly
follow the instructions.
HB7008CD
HB9001BB
The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk or cargo area.
To take out the jack:
Remove the cover, turn the jackscrew counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
HB9041BAHB9040BA
If the jackscrew is too tight to be loosened by hand, loosen it using a
screwdriver or the jack handle.
9-8
The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before using it.
6. (If your vehicle has wheel covers) Insert the wheel nut wrench into the
notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry it off.
OM-H0376
HB9032BA
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove
the nuts.
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point clos-
est to the flat tire.
HB9012BB
OM-H2262
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the
jack-up point.
If your vehicle is equipped with side sill skirts, jack-up points are pointed
9
In case of emergency
9-9
– CONTINUED –
to by arrow marks on the underside of the side sill skirt. Place the jack
under the front or rear jack-up point closest to flat tire.
HS9023BA
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the
tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
OM-H2263
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the
wheel and hub with a cloth.
9-10
HG0104OM-H0172
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.
OM-H0377
The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 ft-lb (78 to 98 N-m, 8 to 10
kg-m). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50
kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel
nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest
automotive service facility.
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment.
9
In case of emergency
9-11
– CONTINUED –
HS0153
Flat tire
Attaching bolt
Spacer
When storing a conventional tire, put the spacer upside down and tight-
en the attaching bolt firmly.
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations.
HB9041CAHB9040CA
After placing the jack in its storage location, turn the jackscrew clock-
wise by hand until it becomes too hard to turn. Then, tighten it by an
additional 1/4 – 1/3 of a turn using a screwdriver or the jack handle. Un-
less the jack is properly secured, it may rattle while the vehicle is mov-
ing.
9-12
Jump starting
WARNING
D Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact
with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump start-
ing.
D Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen.
It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
D Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suit-
able eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings,
bands or other metal jewelry.
D Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are avail-
able.
D A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) bat-
tery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to
another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.
Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about
the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
9
In case of emergency
9-13
– CONTINUED –
B How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal
is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two ve-
hicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.
HB8007BC
9-14
HB9031BB
1 Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the
discharged battery.
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
3 Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (–) terminal
of the booster battery.
4 Connect the other end of the cable.
2.5 liter models: To the engine lifting bracket.
3.0 liter models: To the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that
the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at
moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the dis-
charged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the re-
verse order.
9
In case of emergency
9-15
– CONTINUED –
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot,
the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine
is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which
could burn you very seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
B If steam is coming from the engine compartment
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it
cools down.
B If no steam is coming from the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, im-
mediately turn the engine off and contact your authorized dealer for
repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the en-
gine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the en-
gine off.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in
the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, add coolant up to the
“MAX” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve
tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick
cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise
slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from
9-16
the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the
cap by pressing down and turning it.
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT and MT) with the front wheels
raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or
with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels
are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to
the operation or deterioration of the center differential.
HG9013BA
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a com-
mercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.
B Towing and tie-down hooks
CAUTION
D Use only specified towing hooks and tie-down hooks. Never
use suspension parts or other body parts for towing or tie-down
purposes.
D Never use the tie-down hook closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
D Do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing hooks.
9
In case of emergency
9-17
– CONTINUED –
HB8012BB
HB9051BBHB9048BB
Towing and
tie-down hook
HB8013BB
9-18
HB9010BB
The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free
a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).
The front towing hook is located on the inside of the towing hook cov-
er below the right-hand headlight.
n Towing hook cover removal procedure
For except OUTBACK models:
HB9049BA
To use the towing hook, insert the top end of the flat tip screwdriver in
a slot on the upper part of the cover, and remove the cover while pry-
ing it off.
Remove the towing hook cover by pulling it toward the side of the ve-
hicle and toward you.
9
In case of emergency
9-19
– CONTINUED –
For OUTBACK models:
HB9042BAHB9045BB
1. Squeeze the sides of portion A and pull the towing hook cover to-
ward you.
HB9043BAHB9021CB
2. Press portion B and simultaneously pull the towing hook cover to-
ward you.
9-20
HB9044AA
3. Turn the towing hook cover clockwise, pivoting it about the side
that is next to the fog lamp. Pull out the towing hook cover to remove
it.
n Towing hook cover installation procedure
For except OUTBACK models:
HB9052BA
Align the towing hook cover with its original installation position and
press all parts of it into place.
9
In case of emergency
9-21
– CONTINUED –
For OUTBACK models:
HB9044CB
1. IInsert the projection C into the hole D.
HB9030CB
2. Push at the portion E.
9-22
B Using a flat-bed truck
HB8008AA
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following proce-
dures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for automatic transmis-
sion vehicles or “1st” for manual transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains.
Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be tak-
en not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
B Towing with all wheels on the ground
WARNING
D Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
D Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not
function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and
steering wheel.
9
In case of emergency
9-23
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
D If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
D Do not run the engine while being towed in this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
D For vehicles with automatic transmission, the traveling speed
must be limited to less than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the traveling
distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and
distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
HB8010AA
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to
bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position while the ve-
hicle is being towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the ve-
hicle.
9-24
Moonroof — if the moonroof cannot be closed
If the moonroof cannot be closed with the moonroof switch, you can
close the moonroof manually.
B Sedan
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from the glove box and screw-
driver from the tool bag.
HB9007BB
HB9006BA
2. Remove the map light lens by prying the edge of the lens with a
regular screwdriver, then remove the switch body retaining screws
and take off the moonroof switch.
HB9008BA
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
D To lower the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
D To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
9
In case of emergency
9-25
– CONTINUED –
B Station wagon
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench from the glove box and screw-
driver from the tool bag.
HB9034BBHB9033BA
2. Remove the plug on the roof trim by inserting the end of the regular
screwdriver between the roof and plug and prying it off.
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
To close the moonroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
Have your vehicle checked or repaired by an authorized SUBARU
dealer.
Maintenance tools
HB9011AA
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools:
9-26
Screwdriver
Wheel nut wrench
Hex-headed wrench (for vehicles with moonroof)
J Jack and jack handle
HB9001BAHBF015CB
Jack handle
Jack
Spare tire
HB7008CAHB8004BD
The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk or cargo area.
To take out the jack, turn the jackscrew counterclockwise to loosen it,
then remove the jack.
The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”.
10
Appearance care
Exterior care 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing and polishing 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning aluminum wheels 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning fog light lens (for OUTBACK) 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection 10-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior 10-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
Exterior care
J Washing
CAUTION
D When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
D Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it.
If water enters the engine air intake, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid reservoir, it will cause engine trouble or faulty
power steering respectively.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is frequent washing.
Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road
grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do
not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent,
make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed
from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make
sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. If the vehicle
is equipped with a rear/roof spoiler, it may be damaged by car wash
brushes or other equipment.
10
Appearance care
10-3
– CONTINUED –
B Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are ex-
tremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody compo-
nents, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with luke-
warm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects
of such agents.
B Using a warm water washer
D Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) or more between the wash-
er nozzle and the vehicle.
D Do not wash the same area continuously.
D If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water
washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they
can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
J Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is
cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted sur-
faces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original lus-
ter and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the lus-
ter or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-
grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the
surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained com-
pound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number
and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with
10-4
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or
an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer
and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact
your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
J Cleaning aluminum wheels
D Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or
agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
D Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a
neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not
clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed wash-
ing device.
D Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon
as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea
breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
J Cleaning fog light lens (for OUTBACK)
HBA017BB
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Stop the engine and turn off the fog lights.
3. Check that the fog lights are not hot. Then, grasp the protector and
turn it approximately 10° counter-clockwise.
4. Pull the protector off the fog light.
5. Wash the lens with water.
6. Apply the protector to the lens at an angle of approximately 10° from
10
Appearance care
10-5
– CONTINUED –
the fog light’s horizontal center line. Then, turn the protector clockwise
until it stops. Finally, check that the protector’s horizontal bars are parallel
with the fog light’s horizontal center line.
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special
materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the
vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable opera-
tion.
B Most common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body
panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel
and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in
coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where
there is considerable industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures
range just above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time,
even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle
which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
B To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle frequently. If you drive on salted roads in the winter
or if you live in a coastal area, you should flush the underbody with
fresh water frequently.
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be
given a very thorough washing.
10-6
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody
components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust
prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under
the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally
check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by
dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause
dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road
salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and
locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubri-
cated periodically.
Cleaning the interior
Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt. Wipe the vinyl areas
with a clean, damp cloth.
B Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is
caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a
soft blush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat
fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild
soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric
10
Appearance care
10-7
– CONTINUED –
cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not
affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
B Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which
will retain its distinctive appearance and feel for many years with
proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the surface can cause the
material to become brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular cleaning
with a soft, moist, natural fiber cloth should be performed monthly,
taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the
stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning woolen fabrics may be used to
remove difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cloth afterwards to
restore the luster. If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in
bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be
covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches may be treated with a com-
mercial leather spray lacquer. You will discover that each leather seat
section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
B Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned
using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or
brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes
and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type clean-
ers suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when neces-
sary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic
interior materials.
10-8
11
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine hood 11-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview 11-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil 11-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system 11-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant 11-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air cleaner element 11-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs 11-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive belts 11-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission oil 11-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid 11-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) 11-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear differential gear oil 11-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid 11-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid 11-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) 11-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster 11-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pedal 11-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) 11-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of brake pad and lining 11-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake stroke 11-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires and wheels 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire inspection 11-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressures and wear 11-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel balance 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear indicators 11-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire rotation 11-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire replacement 11-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel replacement 11-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel covers 11-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of windshield wiper blades 11-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
Battery 11-51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses 11-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main fuse 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs 11-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight 11-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog light (if equipped) 11-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front turn signal light, parking light and marker light 11-59. . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear combination lights 11-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License plate light 11-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map light, dome light, luggage compartment light
and door step light 11-65
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk light 11-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High mount stop light 11-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Maintenance and service
11-3
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular in-
tervals are shown in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all
work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiar-
ize yourself with the information provided in this section on general main-
tenance and service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle
operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service
performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
D Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus.
Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or
injuries to persons nearby.
D Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on
your vehicle.
D Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the ve-
hicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery
acid.
D Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully compe-
tent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not
experienced in servicing vehicles.
11-4
D Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are
well maintained.
D Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always
use a safety stands to support the vehicle.
D Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area,
such as a garage or other closed areas.
D Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
D Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the
fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
D Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or
fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thorough-
ly wash them out with clean water.
D Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or
seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inopera-
tive. The wiring and connectors of these systems are yellow for
easy identification. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring.
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
J Before checking or servicing in the engine compart-
ment
D Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
D Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very
hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time af-
ter the engine is stopped.
D Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
D Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the cooling fan may oper-
ate suddenly even when the engine is stopped.
11
Maintenance and service
11-5
– CONTINUED –
J When you do checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
Engine hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving
and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious
bodily injury.
HBB002BAHBB001BA
11-6
HBB003BA
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary hood release located under the front grille by
moving the lever toward the left. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the
hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in. (15 cm) from the
closed position and let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.
Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
11
Maintenance and service
11-7
– CONTINUED –
Engine compartment overview
B 2.5 liter models
HBB036BB
1 Manual transmission oil level
gauge (MT) (page 11-23) or
Differential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-26)
2 Air cleaner element
(page 11-18)
3 Clutch fluid reservoir
(page 11-32)
4 Automatic transmission fluid
level gauge (page 11-24)
5 Brake fluid reservoir
(page 11-30)
6 Fuel filter
7 Windshield washer tank
(page 11-47)
8 Fuse box (page 11-52)
9 Battery (page 11-51)
Q Engine oil filler cap
(page 11-9)
W Engine coolant reservoir
(page 11-15)
E Radiator cap (page 11-15)
R Engine oil level gauge
(page 11-9)
T Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-29)
11-8
B 3.0 liter models
HBB058BB
1 Air cleaner element
(page 11-18)
2 Differential gear oil level gauge
(AT) (page 11-26)
3 Automatic transmission fluid
level gauge (page 11-24)
4 Brake fluid reservoir
(page 11-30)
5 Fuel filter
6 Windshield washer tank
(page 11-47)
7 Fuse box (page 11-52)
8 Battery (page 11-51)
9 Engine oil filler cap
(page 11-9)
Q Engine coolant reservoir
(page 11-15)
W Engine oil level gauge
(page 11-9)
E Radiator cap (page 11-15)
R Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-29)
11
Maintenance and service
11-9
– CONTINUED –
Engine oil
B Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.
HBB061BDHBB004JA
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the
graphic symbol
on its top appearing as shown in the illustra-
tion.
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few min-
utes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil
above the upper level when the engine is cold.
In 2.5-liter-engine models, the dipstick has a notch above the upper
level.
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level
reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch
mark. This is caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil.
11-10
B Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than
listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads,
when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely
cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
HBB005BB
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the en-
gine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate
container and disposed of properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has com-
pletely drained out.
11
Maintenance and service
11-11
– CONTINUED –
HBB051BB
HBB055BAHBB054BA
6. Remove three clips at the front of the cover under the oil filter.
7. Slide the cover toward the vehicle front to remove it.
8. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
9. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the
seal.
10. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the lower crank case and
install the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage
the seal.
11. Tighten it approximately two-thirds of a turn after the seal makes
contact with the lower crank case.
CAUTION
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil
leak.
11-12
12. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
13. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity (Guideline):
2.5 liter models: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0 liter models: 5.9 US qt (5.6 liters, 4.9 Imp qt)
The oil quantity indicated above is only a guideline. The necessary
quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained.
The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the tempera-
ture of the oil and the time the oil is left flowing out. After refilling the
engine with oil, therefore, you must use the dipstick to confirm that the
level is correct.
14. Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around
the filter’s rubber seal and drain plug.
15. Run the engine until it reaches the normal operating temperature.
Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain
back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-3, which can be identified with the new API
certification mark (Starburst mark)
or API classification SL with the words “ENERGY CON-
SERVING” (if you cannot obtain the oil with SL grade,
you may use SJ grade “ENERGY CONSERVING” oil).
These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either
or both of the following marks displayed on the oil container.
11
Maintenance and service
11-13
– CONTINUED –
New API Certification Mark
(Starburst Mark)
1 Indicates the oil quality by API desig-
nations
2 Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3 Indicates that the oil has fuel saving
capabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well
as one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the rec-
ommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as
they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those rec-
ommended by SUBARU.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower vis-
cosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of
higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.
OM-H2756
SAE viscosity numbr and applicable temperature
11-14
B Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving
conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high tempera-
tures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as towing a trailer, use
of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification SL (or SJ): SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50,
20W-40, 20W-50
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
CAUTION
D The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides
protection against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). For adding,
use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50%
soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improp-
er coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is im-
portant to maintain protection against freezing and corrosion,
even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix differ-
ent kinds of coolant.
D Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alco-
hol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint sur-
face.
B Hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically
11
Maintenance and service
11-15
– CONTINUED –
controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific tem-
perature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine
coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the
cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if
necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the
engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system
and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
J Engine coolant
B Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
HBB004FB
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the
engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level mark, add
coolant up to the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, re-
move the radiator cap and refill as required.
11-16
HG0115
Rubber gaskets
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the caps
and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the
proper position.
B Changing the coolant
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
Change the engine coolant using the following procedures according
to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain
plug.
11
Maintenance and service
11-17
– CONTINUED –
HBB059BB
HBB006BB
3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then
drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug secure-
ly.
HBB004FBHBB007CB
4. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the radiator filler neck and to the
reserve tank’s “FULL” level mark. Do not pour the coolant too quickly,
as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the sys-
tem.
Coolant capacity (Guideline):
2.5 liter models MT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT. 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
3.0 liter models 8.4 US qt (7.9 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)
11-18
HG0115
Rubber gaskets
5. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make
sure that the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is correctly in place.
6. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to
3,000 rpm.
7. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to
140°F [50 to 60°C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the
radiator’s filler neck and to the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.
8. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed.
The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops
flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not
installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is
perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life
shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnecessary to clean or
wash the element.
11
Maintenance and service
11-19
– CONTINUED –
B Replacing the air cleaner element
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance sched-
ule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under extremely
dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
n 2.5 liter models
HBB064BBHBB063BB
1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner element case.
2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air cleaner element
case.
3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from the front air clean-
er element case and remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner element cases
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner element case into
the slits on the front air cleaner element case and snap the three
clamps on the rear air cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.
11-20
n 3.0 liter models
HBB056BA
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner ele-
ment.
3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case with a damp
cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
HBB057BA
To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the two projections on the
air cleaner case cover into the slits on the air cleaner case and then
snap the two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.
11
Maintenance and service
11-21
– CONTINUED –
Spark plugs
CAUTION
D When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
D Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.
HBA004BA
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you
have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance
schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
B Recommended spark plugs
2.5 liter models:
RC10YC4 (Champion)
BKR6E-11 (NGK)
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
3.0 liter models: PLFR6A-11 (NGK)
11-22
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor de-
pend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension
be correct.
B 2.5 liter models
HGA005BB
in (mm)
Deflection
New belt Used belt
1
0.28 — 0.35
(7.0 — 9.0)
0.35 — 0.43
(9.0 — 11.0)
2
0.30 — 0.33
(7.5 — 8.5)
0.35 — 0.40
(9.0 — 10.0)
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adja-
cent pulleys and apply a force of 22 lb (98 N, 10 kg) midway between
the pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the
amount specified.
B 3.0 liter models
It is unnecessary to check belt tension periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt tension adjuster. However,
replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance
11
Maintenance and service
11-23
– CONTINUED –
schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Manual transmission oil
B Checking the oil level
Check the oil level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
OM-H0210
Upper level
Lower level
HBB004DB
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up
to the upper level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
11-24
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0205
Automatic transmission fluid
B Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature
rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore,
there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and
cold fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid
on the “COLD” range, we recommend checking the fluid level when
the fluid is at operating temperature.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the
transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 158 to 176°F
(70 to 80°C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the “P”
position, and run the engine at idling speed.
11
Maintenance and service
11-25
– CONTINUED –
HBB004KB
HBB079BB
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is
below the lower level on the “HOT” range, add the recommended au-
tomatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the
automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between
the lower level and upper level on the “COLD” range. If it is below that
range, add fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
B Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
11-26
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles)
B Checking the oil level
Check the differential oil level monthly.
HBA010BB
Lower level
Upper level
HBB004EB
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
11
Maintenance and service
11-27
– CONTINUED –
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0212
Rear differential gear oil
B Checking the gear oil level
CAUTION
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear differential protector. The
differential protector provides protection to the rear differential assem-
bly during off-road use. Removal of the rear differential protector is not
required when checking the oil level.
11-28
HBB066BBHBB065BB
HB0078HB0077
Filler plug
Drain plug
Filler hole
Drain hole
Oil level
Others
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil
level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil
level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler
hole to raise the level.
B Recommended grade and viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
11
Maintenance and service
11-29
– CONTINUED –
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0205
Power steering fluid
B Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
D When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
D Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
The power steering fluid expands greatly as its temperature rises; the
fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the reser-
voir tank has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the engine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has been run: Check that the oil
level is between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on the surface of the
reservoir tank.
11-30
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is run: Check that the oil level
is between “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the surface of the res-
ervoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the applicable “MIN” line, add the
recommended fluid as necessary to bring the level between the
“MIN” and “MAX” line.
HBB031BBHBB030BB
Specified
range
Specified
range
Reservoir tank
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
B Recommended fluid
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake fluid
B Checking the fluid level
WARNING
D Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
D Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois-
ture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
11
Maintenance and service
11-31
– CONTINUED –
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
D Never use different brands of brake fluid together.
D When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the reservoir.
D Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber
parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.
Check the fluid level monthly.
HBB004GB
“MIN” level
mark
“MAX” level mark
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is be-
low “MIN”, add the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
B Recommended brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
11-32
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)
B Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
CAUTION
D Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed
moisture can cause improper clutch operation.
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
D Never use different brands of clutch fluid together.
D When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below
“MIN” level mark, add the recommended clutch fluid to “MAX” level
mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
“MIN” level mark
“MAX” level mark
HBB004HB
11
Maintenance and service
11-33
– CONTINUED –
B Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as described below, have it
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal several times, applying
the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should
not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should
move slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal
depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster.
Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each
depression.
11-34
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
B Checking the brake pedal free play
OM-H0224
0.04 — 0.12 in
(1.0 — 3.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times.
Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free
play with a force of less than 2 lb (10 N, 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
B Checking the brake pedal reserve distance
OM-H0225
More than
2.56 in
(65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 66 lb (294 N, 30 kg)
11
Maintenance and service
11-35
– CONTINUED –
and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal
pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the
pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles)
Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
B Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises
when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or re-
verse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the en-
gine and transmission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage.
B Checking the clutch pedal free play
OM-H0224
0.16 — 0.51 in
(4.0 — 13.0 mm)
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel re-
sistance, and check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
11-36
Replacement of brake pad and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replacement.
OM-H0163
The front disc brakes and the right rear disc brake have an audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their ser-
vice limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when
the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal,
have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
B Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU
parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:
n Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on
the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
11
Maintenance and service
11-37
– CONTINUED –
n Parking brake lining
WARNING
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driv-
ing.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking
brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approxi-
mately 33 lb [147 N, 15 kg].)
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat
this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out
of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located
on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke: 7 — 8 notches / 44 lb (196 N, 20 kg)
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When the parking brake is
properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up
seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 44 lb, 196 N, 20 kg). If the
parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the
brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
11-38
HB4001CB
Tires and wheels
J Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires present on your vehicle.
B All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of trac-
tion, handling and braking performance in year-round driving includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not
offer as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in heavy or
loose snow or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud &
Snow) on the tire sidewall.
B Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway
driving under dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on
snow-covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly
recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
11
Maintenance and service
11-39
– CONTINUED –
B Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on snow-covered and icy
roads. However winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires
and all season tires on roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.
J Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails,
and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
D When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh
treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can
suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of
damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to
drive over curbs, potholes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a walking pace or
less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make
sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the
vehicle.
D If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
J Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires’ service
lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if nec-
essary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least
once a month (for example, during a fuel stop) and before any long jour-
ney.
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge
to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
11-40
HB0382
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire
pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the ambient tempera-
ture. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
D The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30
kPa, 0.3 kg/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
D The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or has been driven less than one mile (1.6
km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will
result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnormally.
11
Maintenance and service
11-41
– CONTINUED –
D Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)
HGB033AA
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also lower.
D Abnormally low tire pressure (tread worn at shoulders)
HSB012AA
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
11-42
D Abnormally high tire pressure (tread worn in center)
HSB013AA
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road-sur-
face bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded
and for the vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the tire pressures to the
values that match current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can
cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A
sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and
destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.
J Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain
vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It
can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal
tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have
them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them
adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.
11
Maintenance and service
11-43
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
Loss of correct wheel alignment* causes the tires to wear on one
side and reduces the vehicle’s running stability. Contact your
SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.
* : The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and
cornering performance.
J Wear indicators
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in. (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
OM-H0231
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immedi-
ately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet
weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss
of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires be-
fore their tread wear indicators become visible.
A) New tread
B) Worn tread
1) Tread wear indicator
11-44
J Tire rotation
OM-H0230
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every
7,500 miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front
and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle and similarly switching
the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire
must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are
correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts
again and retighten any nut that has become loose.
J Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle’s
design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard
equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle
and were selected to give the best possible combination of running per-
formance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to
have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire placard
and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on
the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride com-
fort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accu-
11
Maintenance and service
11-45
– CONTINUED –
racy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately
changes the vehicle’s ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread
pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with
new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires
at the same time.
WARNING
D All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand
(tread pattern), construction, degree of wear, speed symbol, load
index and size. Mixing tires of different types, sizes or degrees of
wear can result in damage to the vehicle’s power train. Use of dif-
ferent types or sizes of tires can also dangerously reduce con-
trollability and braking performance and can lead to an accident.
D Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with
belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously
reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.
J Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the re-
placement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted
as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available from
SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper op-
eration and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well
housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could
lead to an accident.
11-46
J Wheel covers
B Removing the wheel cover
HB9032BA
Insert the wheel nut wrench into the notch provided, and pry the
wheel cover off.
B Installing the wheel cover
HGA013BA
Align the valve with the valve hole in the cover, then fit the cover on
the wheel by tapping your hand evenly around the circumference of
the cover.
NOTE
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or
to change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts af-
ter driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
11
Maintenance and service
11-47
– CONTINUED –
tighten it to the specified torque.
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them
carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.
D When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximatly 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
D Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface
of the wheel.
D Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
D Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire,
otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.
D When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be
sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for aluminum
wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause
paint damage.
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill
the fluid up to the neck of the reservoir.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use
clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield
washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl
alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies
according to how much it is diluted, as indicated below.
11-48
Washer Fluid Concentration
Freezing Temperature
30%
50%
100%
10.4°F (–12°C)
–4 °F (–20°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
HBB004IA
Replacement of windshield wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the
wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield
and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as
paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method,
replace the wiper blades using the following procedures:
11
Maintenance and service
11-49
– CONTINUED –
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and push-
ing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper
blade stopper.
HS0190
Stopper
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly
until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.
HS0191
Metal support
11-50
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove
the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new
blade rubber.
HS0192
Metal spines
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber
and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.
Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper blade may scratch the windshield.
HS0194HS0193
Stopper
6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm.
11
Maintenance and service
11-51
– CONTINUED –
Battery
WARNING
D Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extin-
guish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a bat-
tery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas
which is highly flammable and explosive.
D For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protec-
tion or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never
lean over a battery.
D Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention
immediately.
D To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
D Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
D Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to case cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after han-
dling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery be-
cause it will shorten battery life.
11-52
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodi-
cally refill with distilled water.
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with mate-
rial other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could re-
sult.
HBB008DA
HB8003CA
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in
two fuse boxes. One is located under the instrument panel behind the
coin tray on the driver’s seat side. The other one is housed in the engine
compartment. The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, in-
spect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.
11
Maintenance and service
11-53
– CONTINUED –
HSB011BBHS0204
Good Blown
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all electri-
cal accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
(For behind the coin tray: open the coin tray and pull it horizontally to
remove it.)
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of each fuse box
cover and the “Fuse and circuits” section in chapter 12 in this manual
show the circuit for each fuse.
HS0207
Fuse puller
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
11-54
Main fuse
HB8003CB
The main fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent dam-
age to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main
fuses if any electrical component fails to operate (except the starter mo-
tor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be replaced.
Use only replacements with the same specified rating as the melted
main fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is replaced, have the electrical
system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any
other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause
the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
11
Maintenance and service
11-55
– CONTINUED –
Replacing bulbs
HB5019EB
Wattage Bulb No.
1 Headlight
GT and OUTBACK models
Low beam 12V–55W H1
High beam 12V–60W 9005 (HB3)
Except GT and OUTBACK models 12V–65/55W 9007 (HB5)
2 Front turn signal 12V–27W 1156NA (Amber)
3 Spot light 12V–8W —
4 Dome light 12V–8W —
5 Door step light 12V–3.4W —
6 Front turn signal light/
parking and front side marker light 12V–27/8W 1157NA (Amber)
7 Front fog light
Except OUTBACK 12V–55W H3
OUTBACK 12V–51W 9006 (HB4)
11-56
Wattage Bulb No.
8 Backup light
Sedan 12V–27W 3156K
Station wagon 12V–27W 1156
9 Luggage area light 12V–13W 912
Q High mount stop light
Sedan 12V–16W 921
Station wagon 12V–13W 912
W Rear turn signal light
Sedan 12V–21W —
Station wagon 12V–21W 7440
E Brake/tail light
Sedan 12V–27/8W 3157K
Station wagon 12V–27/8W 1157
R Licence plate light
Sedan 12V–5W 168
Station wagon 12V–3.8W or 5W 194 or 168
T Trunk room light 12V–5W W5W
HBF013FC
HBB033BC
11
Maintenance and service
11-57
– CONTINUED –
J Headlight
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you
touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, caus-
ing the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the
bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with al-
cohol.
NOTE
If headlight aiming is required, consult your SUBARU dealer for
proper adjustment of the headlight aim.
B For GT and OUTBACK models
HBB040BBHBB039BA
Remove the headlight bulb cover, by turning it counterclockwise.
11-58
n Low beam light bulbs
HBB042BAHBB041BB
1. Disconnect the electrical connector for the black cable.
2. Remove the retainer spring.
3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring securely.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector for black cable.
5. Install the headlight bulb cover.
n High beam light bulbs
HBB044BBHBB043BA
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb.
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At this time, use care not to
touch the bulb surface.
11
Maintenance and service
11-59
– CONTINUED –
5. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until
it clicks.
6. Install the headlight bulb cover.
B Except GT and OUTBACK models
HBB046BAHBB045BB
1. Disconnect the electrical connector while pressing the lock release
tab.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb holder in the headlight assembly by turning it clock-
wise until it locks.
6. Remove the electrical connector.
J Front fog light (if equipped)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer
replace the bulbs if necessary.
J Front turn signal light, parking light and side marker
light
The headlight assembly must be removed before the front turn signal
light and parking light bulbs can be replaced. When the headlight as-
sembly has been removed and then reinstalled, it may become neces-
sary to make a headlight aiming adjustment. After a bulb has been re-
placed, it is recommended that the headlight aiming adjustment be
11-60
made at a SUBARU dealer.
HBB016BA
1. Remove the headlight assembly mounting screws located at the top
of and the front of the headlight assembly using a phillips screwdriver or
an open-end wrench.
2. Move the headlight assembly forward.
HBB039CB
HBB020BA
3. Remove the bulb socket from the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning counter-
clockwise. Install a new bulb in the socket.
5. Set the bulb socket into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Set the headlight assembly into the vehicle body. Tighten the mount-
ing screws.
11
Maintenance and service
11-61
– CONTINUED –
J Rear combination lights
B Sedan
HBB034BC
HBF014DA
HBB035BB
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Open the rear combination light cover.
For covers on the trunk lid:
Unlatch the cover by pushing the knob and open the cover.
For covers on the trunk wall:
Unlatch the cover by moving the knob upward and open the cover.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the light assembly by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal light: Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing
it and turning it counterclockwise.
Others: Pull the bulb out of the socket.
11-62
5. Install a new bulb in the socket.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
7. Close the cover and latch the clock.
B Station wagon
n Brake/tail and rear turn signal light bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. It is recommended that you
have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
HBB022BBHBB021BB
1. Remove the light bulb replacement service hole covers at two
places by prying the edge of the cover with a regular screwdriver.
2. Remove the upper and lower nuts. Then, slide the rear combina-
tion lamp assembly to the rear and remove it from the vehicle.
HBB070BB
11
Maintenance and service
11-63
– CONTINUED –
3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and lower screws
that secure the side cover of the rear combination light assembly.
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear combination light assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
HBB025BB
HBB048BB
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Turn signal light: Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Brake/tail light: Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Install a new bulb in the socket.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the side cover to the rear com-
bination light assembly.
9. Fit the rear combination light assembly into the vehicle body and
tighten the nuts from the interior of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the light bulb replacement service hole covers.
11-64
n Back-up and brake/tail light bulbs
HBB025BAHBB026BC
1. Unlatch the rear finisher light cover by moving the knob upward.
Open the cover up.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the rear finisher light assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning coun-
terclockwise. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear finisher light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Close the cover and latch the lock.
J License plate light
HBB027BAHBF013EA
1. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver.
11
Maintenance and service
11-65
– CONTINUED –
2. Remove the cover and lens.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
J Map light, dome light, luggage compartment light and
door step light
HBB068BDHBB029BD
HBB067BB
HSA005BB
11-66
HBS037AB
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a regular screw-
driver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
J Trunk light
HBF014FA
1. Remove the cover by squeezing its sides and pulling it.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
11
Maintenance and service
11-67
– CONTINUED –
J High mount stop light
B Sedan
OM-H2350
1. Remove the high mount stop light cover by prying on the edge
with a screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the cover.
B Station wagon
HBB028BA
1. Remove the mounting screw covers by prying on the edge with a
screwdriver.
2. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver and then
remove the high mount stop light cover.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
11-68
4. Reinstall the cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws then reinstall the covers.
NOTE
Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have your SUBARU dealer
replace these bulbs if necessary.
12
Specifications
Specifications 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical system 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel alignment 12-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and circuits 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment 12-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb chart 12-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification 12-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
J Dimensions
Legacy sedan
Overall length 184.4 in (4,685 mm)
Overall width 68.7 in (1,745 mm)
Overall height 55.7 in (1,415 mm)
Ground clearance 6.1 in (155 mm)
Front tread 57.5 in (1,460 mm)
Rear tread 57.5 in (1,460 mm)
Wheelbase 104.3 in (2,650 mm)
Legacy station wagon
Overall length 187.4 in (4,760 mm)
Overall width 68.7 in (1,745 mm)
Overall height 56.6 in (1,435 mm)
59.6 in (1,525 mm)*
Ground clearance 6.3 in (160 mm)
Front tread 57.5 in (1,460 mm)
Rear tread 57.3 in (1,455 mm)
Wheelbase 104.3 in (2,650 mm)
*: With roof rail
OUTBACK sedan
Overall length 184.4 in (4,685 mm)
Overall width 68.7 in (1,745 mm)
Overall height 58.3 in (1,480 mm)
Ground clearance 7.3 in (185 mm)
Front tread 57.9 in (1,470 mm)
Rear tread 57.7 in (1,465 mm)
Wheelbase 104.3 in (2,650 mm)
OUTBACK station wagon
Overall length 187.4 in (4,760 mm)
Overall width 68.7 in (1,745 mm)
12
Specifications
12-3
– CONTINUED –
Overall height 62.2 in (1,580 mm)
Ground clearance
2.5 liter models 7.3 in (185 mm)
3.0 liter models 7.9 in (200 mm)
Front tread 57.9 in (1,470 mm)
Rear tread 57.7 in (1,465 mm)
Wheelbase 104.3 in (2,650 mm)
J Engine
2.5 liter
Engine model EJ251
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled
4 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Engine displacement 2,457 cc (150 cu in.)
Bore 3.92 in (99.5 mm)
Stroke 3.11 in (79.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Firing order 1 - 3 - 2 - 4
3.0 liter
Engine model EZ30D
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled
6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Engine displacement 3,000 cc (183.0 cu in.)
Bore 3.51 in (89.2 mm)
Stroke 3.15 in (80.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.7 : 1
Firing order 1 - 6 - 3 - 2 - 5 - 4
J Electrical system
2.5 liter
Battery type and capacity
MT: 55D23L
AT: 75D23L
Alternator 12V-90A
12-4
Spark plugs type RC10YC4 (Champion)
BKR6E-11 (NGK)
BKR5E-11 (NGK)
3.0 liter
Battery type and capacity 75D23L
Alternator 12V-100A
Spark plugs type PLFR6A-11 (NGK)
J Capacities
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 2.5 liter 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0 liter 5.9 US qt (5.6 liters, 4.9 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil
Brighton, L (AT) 0.9 US qt (0.9 liter, 0.8 Imp qt)
Others 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering gear fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 2.5 liter MT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
3.0 liter 8.4 US qt (7.9 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)
J Tires
Legacy
Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless
Size Brighton P195/60R15 87H
L P205/60R15 90H
GT P205/55R16 89H
Temporary spare T135/70D16
T145/80D16*
1
Pressure
Front Brighton 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm
2
)
GT, L 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kg/cm
2
)
Rear Brighton 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kg/cm
2
)
12
Specifications
12-5
– CONTINUED –
GT, L 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kg/cm
2
)
Temporary spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm
2
)
Wheel size 15 x 6JJ, 16 x 6
1
/
2
JJ
*
1
: GT models
OUTBACK
Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless
Size P225/60R16 97H
Temporary spare T145/80R16
Pressure
Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kg/cm
2
)
Trailer towing 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kg/cm
2
)
Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kg/cm
2
)
Trailer towing 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kg/cm
2
)
Temporary spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm
2
)
Wheel size 16 x 6
1
/
2
JJ
J Wheel alignment
Legacy sedan
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Rear 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Camber Front –0°05’ " 30’
Rear –0°30’ " 45’
Legacy station wagon
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Rear 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Camber Front –0°05’ " 30’
Rear –0°20’ " 45’
OUTBACK sedan
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Rear 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Camber Front 0°20’ " 30’
Rear –0°10’ " 45’
OUTBACK station wagon
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
12-6
Rear 0 " 0.12 in (0 " 3 mm)
Camber Front 0°20’ " 30’
Rear –0°10’ " 45’
Fuses and circuits
J Fuse panel located behind the coin tray
B 2.5 liter models
HBC001BB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A D Heater fan
2 15A D Heater fan
3 15A D Power door lock
D Keyless entry
12
Specifications
12-7
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
4 20A D Cigarette lighter
D Remote controlled rear view mirrors
5 10A D Tail light
D Parking light
6 15A D SRS airbag
7 15A D Front fog light
8 30A D ABS solenoid
9 15A D Radio
D Clock
10 15A D Trailer
11 15A D Engine ignition system
D SRS airbag
12 10A D Illumination brightness control
13 15A D Fuel pump
14 10A D Rear window wiper and washer
15 30A D Windshield wiper and washer
16 20A D Brake light
17 15A D Air conditioner
18 15A D Backup light
D Cruise control
D ABS control
12-8
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
19 20A D Mirror heater
D Wiper deicer
20 20A D Accessory power socket
D Seat heater
B 3.0 liter models
HBC001CB
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A D Heater fan
2 15A D Heater fan
3 15A D Power door lock
D Keyless entry
12
Specifications
12-9
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
4 20A D Cigarette lighter
D Remote controlled rear view mirrors
5 10A D Tail light
D Parking light
6 15A D SRS airbag
7 15A D Front fog light
8 30A D ABS (VDC) solenoid
9 15A D Radio
D Clock
10 15A D Trailer
11 15A D Engine ignition system
D SRS airbag
12 10A D Illumination brightness control
13 15A D Fuel pump
14 10A D Rear window wiper and washer
15 30A D Windshield wiper and washer
16 20A D Brake light
17 15A D Air conditioner
18 15A D Backup light
D Cruise control
D ABS (VDC) control
19 20A D Mirror heater
D Wiper deicer
12-10
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
20 20A D McIntosh audio amp (if equipped)
21 20A D Accessory power socket
D Seat heater
J Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
B 2.5 liter models
HBC003BC
FWD socket
(without SPORTSHIFT mode)
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Main)
2 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Sub)
3 50A D ABS motor
4 20A D Rear window defogger
5 15A D Hazard warning flasher
D Horn
6 15A D Meter
D SRS airbag system warning light
12
Specifications
12-11
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
7 10A D Automatic transmission control unit
D ABS UNIT
8 10A D Alternator
9 15A D Headlight (right side)
10 15A D Headlight (left side)
11 20A D Lighting switch
12 15A D Clock
D Interior light
12-12
B 3.0 liter models
HBC004BC
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 30A D Radiator cooling fan (Main)
2 30A D Radiator cooling fan (Sub)
3 50A D ABS (VDC) motor
4 30A D McIntosh audio amp (if equipped)
5 20A D Rear window defogger
6 15A D Hazard warning flasher
D Horn
7 15A D Meter
D SRS airbag system warning light
8 10A D Automatic transmission control unit
D ABS UNIT
9 10A D Alternator
10 15A D Headlight (right side)
12
Specifications
12-13
– CONTINUED –
Fuse panel CircuitFuse rating
11 15A D Headlight (left side)
12 20A D Lighting switch
13 15A D Clock
D Interior light
12-14
Bulb chart
Wattage Bulb No.
Headlight
GT and OUTBACK
Low beam 12V–55W H1
High beam 12V–60W 9005 (HB3)
Except GT and OUTBACK 12V–60/55W 9007 (HB5)
Front turn signal 12V–27W 1156NA (Amber)
Spot light 12V–8W —
Dome light 12V–8W —
Door step light 12V–3.4W —
Parking and front side marker light 12V–27/8W 1157NA (Amber)
Front fog light
Except OUTBACK 12V–55W H3
OUTBACK 12V–51W 9006 (HB4)
Backup light
Sedan 12V–27W 3156K
Station wagon 12V–27W 1156
Luggage area light 12V–13W —
High mount stop light
Sedan 12V–16W 921
Station wagon 12V–13W 912
Rear turn signal light
Sedan 12V–21W —
Station wagon 12V–21W R2172 7440
Brake/tail light
Sedan 12V–27/8W 3157K
Station wagon 12V–27/8W 1157
Licence plate light
Sedan 12V–5W 168
Station wagon 12V–3.8W or 5W 194 or 168
Trunk room light 12V–5W W5W
12
Specifications
12-15
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle identification
HBD002BB
1 Emission control label
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Radio noise label (Canada
model)
4 Vacuum hose connections
label
5 Tire inflation pressure label
6 Certification and bar cord
label
7 Vehicle identification number
plate
8 Model number plate
12-16
13
Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treadwear 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction AA, A, B, C 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature A, B, C 13-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2
For U.S.A.
The following information has been compiled according to Code of Fed-
eral Regulations “Title 49, Part 575”.
Uniform tire quality grading standards
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires
in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to
aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diame-
ters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.
All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
J Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
J Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of as-
13
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13-3
– CONTINUED –
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
J Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher lev-
els of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re-
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-
inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
13-4
Reporting safety defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an inves-
tigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America,
Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
14
Index
14-2
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS warning light 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory power outlet 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air cleaner element 11-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioner operation 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air filtration system (if equipped) 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheels (If equipped) 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna system 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest (if equipped) 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio set 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic climate control system (if equipped) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission (Brighton, L, Outback) 7-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission (with SPORTSHIFT mode –
2.5GT, 2.5GTLO) 7-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission fluid 11-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Battery 11-51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster 11-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid 11-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pedal 11-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system 7-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system warning light 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking tips 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb chart 12-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
Capacities 12-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo area light (if equipped) 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter 8-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center console 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Index
14-3
Charge warning light 3-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp 3-12. . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint systems 1-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety locks 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter socket (if equipped) 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning aluminum wheels 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning fog light lens (for OUTBACK) 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior 10-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) 11-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) 11-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin compartment 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience hook 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenient tie-down hooks (if equipped) 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system 11-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection 10-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control (if equipped) 7-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
Daytime running light system 3-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators 7-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome light 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door locks 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door open warning lights 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive belts 11-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in foreign countries 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips for AWD vehicles 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual moonroofs (Station wagon) 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E
Electrical system 12-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 12-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview 11-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4
Engine coolant 11-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine hood 11-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil 11-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine overheating 9-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior care 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F
Fastening the seatbelt 1-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat tires 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat (if equipped) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch (if equipped) 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding down the rear seat — Station wagon 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) 11-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog light (if equipped) 11-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seatbelt pretensioners 1-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front turn signal light, parking light and marker light 11-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AT vehicles) 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy hints 8-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel filler lid and cap 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel requirements 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located behind the coin tray 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment 12-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses 11-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and circuits 12-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Glove box 6-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR and GAWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) 8-19
. . .
H
Hazard warning flasher 3-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Index
14-5
Headlight 11-57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headrest adjustment —
Rear center seating position on Station wagon 1-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater operation 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High beam indicator light 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High mount stop light 11-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
If you park your vehicle in an emergency 9-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illumination brightness control 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) 5-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside mirror 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories 5-3, 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal trunk lid release handle 2-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J
Jack and jack handle 9-26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump starting 9-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) 3-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key reminder chime 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L
License plate light 11-64
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light control switch 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading your vehicle 8-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low fuel warning light 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover (if equipped) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-6
M
Main fuse 11-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance schedule 11-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance tools 9-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual heating and air conditioning system 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission oil 11-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map light (if equipped) 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map light, dome light, luggage compartment light and
door step light 11-65
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
McIntosh audio set (if equipped) 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meters and gauges 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof (if equipped) 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof — if the moonroof cannot be closed 9-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 8-2
. . . . . .
O
Odometer/Trip meter 3-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off road driving 8-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pressure warning light 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar personal calling 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar services 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar subscription plans 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar system (if equipped) 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar system limitations 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar virtual advisor 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature indicator (if equipped) 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console (if equipped) 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Index
14-7
P
Parking brake stroke 11-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking light switch 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking your vehicle 7-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic inspections 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power door locking switches 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering 7-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid 11-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions against vehicle modification 1-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc (CD) 5-39. . . . . . . .
Preparing to drive 7-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R
Rear combination lights 11-61
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear differential gear oil 11-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear gate (Station wagon) 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if equipped) 7-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of brake pad and lining 11-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of windshield wiper blades 11-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs 11-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects (USA) 13-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking the vehicle 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) 8-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S
Seatbelt maintenance 1-28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelts 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt safety tips 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatbelt warning light and chime 1-18, 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater (if equipped) 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security system (if equipped) 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-8
Security system status indicator light (if equipped) 3-18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of SPORTSHIFT mode (manual mode) 7-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever 7-16, 7-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift lock release 7-20, 7-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift position indicator (for AT vehicles) 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow tires 8-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs 11-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications 12-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spotlight (if equipped) 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system monitors 1-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system servicing 1-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbag system warning light 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS frontal airbag 1-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbag (if equipped) 1-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a flooded engine 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine during cold weather below –4 °F (–20°C) 7-11. . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for a manual transmission vehicle 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine for an automatic transmission vehicle 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . .
State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the engine 7-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subfloor storage (if equipped) 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T
Tachometer 3-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature A, B, C 13-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature gauge 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary spare tire 9-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilting/sliding moonroof (Sedan) 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire chains 8-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire inspection 11-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Index
14-9
Tire pressures and wear 11-39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire replacement 11-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire rotation 11-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires 12-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires and wheels 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top tether anchorages 1-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing 9-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction AA, A, B, C 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer hitch (if equipped) 8-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing (for OUTBACK) 8-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treadwear 13-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid (Sedan) 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk light 11-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal indicator lights 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal lever 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type A and B audio set (if equipped) 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type C audio set (if equipped) 5-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires 11-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U
Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V
Vanity mirror (if equipped) 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC OFF switch 7-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) OFF indicator light (if equipped) 3-18.
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) operation indicator light
(if equipped) 3-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) system (if equipped) 7-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDC (Vehicle Dynamics Control) warning light (if equipped) 3-15. . . . . . . . .
Vehicle capacity weight 8-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification 12-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbags and
lap/shoulder restraints 1-43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-10
W
Warning and indicator lights 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing 10-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing and polishing 10-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear indicators 11-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel alignment 12-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel balance 11-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel covers 11-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel replacement 11-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid 11-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switches 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving 8-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAS STATION REFERENCE
Fuel:
2.5 Liter models:
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87
AKI or higher.
3.0 Liter models:
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI or higher. Regular unleaded gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of 87 AKI may be used if necessary. For opti-
mum engine performance and driveability, it is recom-
mended that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline.
Fuel octane rating:
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane
and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to
as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in
this manual.
Fuel capacity:
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil:
Use only API classification SL with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING”
and the New API certification mark (starburst mark) dis-
played on the container.
Engine oil capacity:
2.5 liter models
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
3.0 liter models
6.1 US qt (5.8 liters, 5.1 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressure:
See the label located under the driver’s door latch.
